Commonwealth of Australia Bills[Index] [Search] [Download] [Related Items] [Help]
This is a Bill, not an Act. For current law, see the Acts databases.
2002
The Parliament of
the
Commonwealth of
Australia
HOUSE OF
REPRESENTATIVES
Presented and read a first
time
New
Business Tax System (Consolidation, Value Shifting, Demergers and Other
Measures) Bill 2002
No. ,
2002
(Treasury)
A Bill
for an Act about income tax to implement a New Business Tax System, and for
related purposes
Contents
Income Tax Assessment Act
1997 3
Income Tax Assessment Act
1997 4
Income Tax Assessment Act
1997 14
Income Tax Assessment Act
1997 23
Income Tax Assessment Act
1997 24
Income Tax Assessment Act
1997 25
Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act
1997 41
Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act
1997 54
Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act
1997 56
Income Tax Assessment Act
1936 59
New Business Tax System (Consolidation) Act (No. 1)
2002 62
Income Tax Assessment Act
1997 63
Income Tax Assessment Act
1997 64
Part 1—Income Tax Assessment Act
1997 115
Part 2—Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act
1997 126
Part 3—Dictionary
amendments 130
Income Tax Assessment Act
1997 130
Part 4—Application of
amendments 131
Part 1—New Divisions inserted in the Income Tax Assessment Act
1997 132
Part 2—Amendment of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act
1997 245
Part 3—Consequential amendment of the Income Tax Assessment Act
1997 247
Division 1—Amendments 247
Division 2—Saving and transitional
provisions 249
Part 4—Consequential amendment of the Income Tax Assessment Act
1936 250
Part 5—Dictionary
amendments 251
Income Tax Assessment Act
1997 251
Part 1—CGT
relief 267
Income Tax Assessment Act
1997 267
Part 2—Dividend
relief 282
Income Tax Assessment Act
1936 282
Part 3—Consequential
amendments 290
Income Tax Assessment Act
1997 290
Part 4—Transitional 295
Part 5—Application 296
A Bill for an Act about income tax to implement a New
Business Tax System, and for related purposes
The Parliament of Australia enacts:
This Act may be cited as the New Business Tax System (Consolidation,
Value Shifting, Demergers and Other Measures) Act 2002.
(1) Each provision of this Act specified in column 1 of the table
commences, or is taken to have commenced, on the day or at the time specified in
column 2 of the table.
|
Commencement information |
||
|---|---|---|
|
Column 1 |
Column 2 |
Column 3 |
|
Provision(s) |
Commencement |
Date/Details |
|
1. Sections 1 to 4 and anything in this Act not elsewhere covered by
this table |
The day on which this Act receives the Royal Assent |
|
|
2. Schedules 1 to 12 |
Immediately after the commencement of the New Business Tax System
(Consolidation) Act (No. 1) 2002 |
|
|
3. Schedule 13 |
Immediately after the commencement of the New Business Tax System
(Imputation) Act 2002 |
|
|
4. Schedules 14 and 15 |
Immediately after the commencement of the New Business Tax System
(Consolidation) Act (No. 1) 2002 |
|
|
5. Schedule 16 |
The day on which this Act receives the Royal Assent |
|
Note: This table relates only to the provisions of this Act
as originally passed by the Parliament and assented to. It will not be expanded
to deal with provisions inserted in this Act after assent.
(2) Column 3 of the table is for additional information that is not part
of this Act. This information may be included in any published version of this
Act.
Each Act that is specified in a Schedule to this Act is amended or
repealed as set out in the applicable items in the Schedule concerned, and any
other item in a Schedule to this Act has effect according to its
terms.
Section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 does not
prevent the amendment of an assessment made before the commencement of this
section for the purposes of giving effect to this Act.
Income Tax Assessment Act
1997
1 Subsection 703-20(2) (table
item 4)
Repeal the item.
Income Tax Assessment Act
1997
1 At the end of subsection
701-25(4)
Add:
Note: As a consequence of fixing the trading stock’s
value at the end of the income year under this subsection, no election would be
available under section 70-45 to value the trading stock at that
time.
Note: The heading to subsection 701-25(4) is altered by
omitting “cost” and substituting
“value”.
2 Subsection 701-35(4)
After “ends”, insert “, or, if section 701-30
applies, of the income year that is taken by subsection (3) of that section
to end,”.
Note: The heading to subsection 701-35(4) is altered by
omitting “cost” and substituting
“value”.
3 At the end of subsection
701-35(4)
Add:
Note: As a consequence of fixing the trading stock’s
value at the end of the income year under this subsection, no election would be
available under section 70-45 to value the trading stock at that
time.
4 Subsection 701-55(6)
After “above”, insert “is to apply in relation to the
asset”.
5 Paragraph 701-70(3)(a)
Repeal the paragraph, substitute:
(a) the following income year (the joining adjustment
year):
(i) if the combining entity is the *head
company and the joining time occurs at the start of an income year—the
income year before that income year; or
(ii) if the combining entity is the head company and subparagraph (i)
does not apply—the income year in which the joining time occurs;
or
(iii) in any other case—the income year that ends, or, if
section 701-30 applies, the income year that is taken by
subsection (3) of that section to end, at the joining time; and
6 Paragraphs 701-70(3)(c) and
(d)
Omit “income year”, substitute “adjustment
year”.
7 Subsection 701-70(5)
Omit “income year and”, substitute “adjustment year
and”.
8 Paragraphs 701-70(5)(a) and
(b)
Omit “income year”, substitute “adjustment
year”.
9 Subparagraph
701-70(7)(b)(ii)
After “started”, insert “, or, if section 701-30
applies, the income year that is taken by subsection (3) of that section to
have started,”.
10 Paragraph 701-75(3)(a)
Repeal the paragraph, substitute:
(a) the following income year (the leaving adjustment
year):
(i) if the separating entity is the *head
company—the income year in which the leaving time occurs; or
(ii) in any other case—the income year that starts, or, if
section 701-30 applies, the income year that is taken by
subsection (3) of that section to start, at the leaving time.
11 Subsection 701-75(5)
Omit “income year”, substitute “adjustment
year”.
12 Paragraph 701-80(3)(a)
Repeal the paragraph, substitute:
(a) the entity *acquired, at or before
11.45 am, by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory, on
21 September 1999, a *depreciating asset
to which Division 40 applies and held the asset continuously until the
entity became a *subsidiary member of the
group; and
13 Subsection 705-30(3)
After “*depreciating asset”,
insert “to which Division 40 applies”.
14 Paragraph 705-45(a)
Repeal the paragraph, substitute:
(a) the joining entity *acquired, at or
before 11.45 am, by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory, on
21 September 1999, a *depreciating asset
to which Division 40 applies and held the asset continuously until the
joining time; and
15 After paragraph
705-50(2)(a)
Insert:
(aa) subsection (5) does not apply to the asset; and
16 Paragraph 705-50(3)(a)
After “franked dividends”, insert “or distributions
included in the step 4 amount mentioned in step 4 in the table in
section 705-60”.
17 Paragraph 705-50(6)(a)
After “*depreciating asset”,
insert “to which Division 40 applies”.
18 Subsection 705-65(3)
Omit “the *members of the joined
group had, just before the joining time,
*disposed of their
*membership interests in the joining
entity”, substitute “a *CGT event
had happened just before the joining time in relation to the
*membership interest”.
19 Subsection 705-65(3)
Omit “the membership interests” (twice occurring), substitute
“the membership interest”.
20 After subsection
705-65(3)
Insert:
Reduction if section 165-115ZD could apply
(3A) If, on the assumption that:
(a) the *members of the joined group had,
just before the joining time, *disposed of
their *membership interest in the joining
entity; and
(b) the consideration received by the members for the disposal were equal
to the *market value of the membership interest
at that time;
the *reduced cost base of the membership
interest would have been reduced as a result of the operation of
section 165-115ZD of this Act or the Income Tax (Transitional
Provisions) Act 1997, then the reduced cost base of the membership
interest that is to be used in subsection (1) of this section is reduced by
the amount of that reduction.
21 Subsection 705-65(4)
After “subsection (3)”, insert “or
(3A)”.
22 Subsection 705-65(4)
After “*CGT event”, insert
“or a *realisation
event”.
23 After subsection
705-65(5)
Insert:
Reduction in reduced cost base under subsection 165-115ZA(3) to be added
back
(5A) If:
(a) in working out the *reduced cost base
of the *membership interest for the purposes of
subsection (1), a reduction has taken place under subsection 165-115ZA(3)
(about alterations in ownership or control of loss companies); and
(b) the reduction is to some extent attributable to so much of an amount
that was taken into account both in working out the amount of the reduction and
in working out:
(i) the step 5 amount under section 705-100; or
(ii) the step 6 amount under section 705-110;
the reduced cost base is, to the extent mentioned in paragraph (b),
increased by:
(c) if subparagraph (b)(i) applies—the amount of that
reduction; or
(d) if subparagraph (b)(ii) applies—the amount of that
reduction multiplied by the *general company
tax rate.
24 Subsection 705-70(1)
(note)
Repeal the note.
25 After subsection
705-70(1)
Insert:
Where liability valued differently for joined group
(1A) However, if, in accordance with those
*accounting standards or statements, the amount
of an accounting liability of the joining entity would be different when it
became an accounting liability of the joined group, the different amount is
treated as the amount of the liability.
Note: Liabilities that the joining entity owes to members of
the joined group would not be excluded under subsection (1) or (1A) even
though the standards or statements require that they be eliminated in
consolidated accounts of a parent entity and its subsidiaries.
26 Subsection 705-75(3)
Omit “and (4)”, substitute “, (3) and
(3A)”.
Note: The heading to subsection 705-75(3) is altered by
omitting “and (4)” and substituting “, (3) and
(3A)”.
27 At the end of
section 705-75
Add:
Application of subsection 705-65(4)
(4) Subsection 705-65(4) applies in relation to assets mentioned in
subsection (2) of this section in a corresponding way to that in which it
applies in relation to members’
*membership interests.
Reduction in reduced cost base under subsection 165-115ZA(3) to be added
back
(5) If:
(a) in working out the *reduced cost base
of a *member’s asset for the purposes of
subsection (2), a reduction has taken place under subsection 165-115ZA(3)
(about alterations in ownership or control of loss companies); and
(b) the reduction is to some extent attributable to so much of an amount
that was taken into account both in working out the amount of the reduction and
in working out:
(i) the step 5 amount under section 705-100; or
(ii) the step 6 amount under section 705-110;
the reduced cost base is, to the extent mentioned in paragraph (b),
increased by:
(c) if subparagraph (b)(i) applies—the amount of that
reduction; or
(d) if subparagraph (b)(ii) applies—the amount of that
reduction multiplied by the *general company
tax rate.
28 Section 705-90
Repeal the section, substitute:
(1) For the purposes of step 3 in the table in section 705-60, the
step 3 amount is worked out in accordance with this section.
Undistributed profits
(2) First work out the undistributed profits of the joining entity at the
joining time. These are the amounts that, in accordance with
*accounting standards, or statements of
accounting concepts made by the Australian Accounting Standards Board, are
retained profits of the joining entity that could be recognised in the joining
entity’s statement of financial position if that statement were prepared
as at the joining time.
Extent to which dividends paid out of undistributed profits would be
frankable
(3) Then work out the extent to which the undistributed profits, if they
had been distributed as dividends at the joining time, could have been franked
in accordance with section 160AQF of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936
on the assumptions in subsection (4) of this section.
Assumptions for purposes of subsection (3)
(4) The assumptions are that the joining entity’s franking account
balance at the end of the income year that ends, or, if section 701-30
applies, of the income year that is taken by subsection (3) of that section
to end, at the joining time had been adjusted to take account of franking
credits or franking debits that would arise if the following were paid just
before the joining time:
(a) the income tax, or *refund of income
tax, on the joining entity’s taxable income for that income year;
and
(b) any income tax, or refund of income tax, that has not yet been paid
(regardless of whether it has become payable or due for payment) on the joining
entity’s taxable income for any earlier income year, other than one
excluded by subsection (5).
Exclusion of certain income years where previous membership of a
consolidated group
(5) If the joining entity was previously a
*subsidiary member of a
*consolidated group, any income year earlier
than the one that started, or, if section 701-30 applies, the one that is
taken by subsection (3) of that section to have started, when the joining
entity ceased to be a subsidiary member of that group is excluded for the
purposes of paragraph (4)(b) of this section.
Undistributed profits must have accrued to joined group and not recouped
losses
(6) Next:
(a) work out the extent to which the undistributed profits that, if they
had been distributed as dividends at the joining time, could have been so
franked accrued to the joined group before the joining time (subsection (7)
states what it means for a profit to accrue to the joined group before the
joining time); and
(b) then exclude those that recouped losses of any
*sort that accrued to the joined group before
the joining time (subsection (8) states what it means for a loss to accrue
to the joined group before the joining time).
The result is the step 3 amount.
Profit accruing to the joined group before the joining
time
(7) A profit accrued to the joined group before the joining time if, on
the following assumptions:
(a) that it was distributed to holders of
*membership interests as it accrued;
and
(b) that entities interposed between the
*head company and the joining entity
successively distributed any of it immediately after receiving it;
it would have been received by the entity that is the head company at the
joining time, in respect of membership interests that it held continuously until
that time either directly or indirectly through interposed entities.
Loss accruing to the joined group before the joining time
(8) A loss accrued to the joined group before the joining time if and to
the extent that, assuming that as it arose it were instead a profit that was
accruing, a distribution of that profit would have been a distribution made to
the joined group out of profits that accrued to the joined group before the
joining time.
Use of reliable estimates
(9) In working out:
(a) for the purposes of subsection (4), the amount of income tax, or
*refund of income tax, on the joining
entity’s taxable income for a particular income year and the extent to
which it has not yet been paid; or
(b) for the purposes of subsection (7), the amount of a profit that
accrued to the joined group during a particular period; or
(c) for the purposes of subsection (8), the amount of a loss that
accrued to the joined group during a particular period;
use the most reliable basis for estimation that is available.
29 Subparagraph
705-95(b)(i)
Omit “705-90(5)”, substitute “705-90(7)”.
30 Subparagraph
705-95(b)(ii)
Omit “705-90(4)”, substitute “705-90(8)”.
31 Paragraph 705-100(1)(b)
Omit “705-90(4)”, substitute “705-90(8)”.
32 Subsection 705-100(2)
Repeal the subsection, substitute:
(2) However, a loss is not to be taken into account under
subsection (1) to the extent that it reduced the undistributed profits
comprising the step 3 amount in the table in section 705-60.
33 Paragraph 705-110(2)(b)
Omit “705-90(4)”, substitute “705-90(8)”.
34 Subsection 705-115(1) (paragraph (b) of
the definition of owned deductions)
Omit “was earned”, substitute “accrued”.
35 Subsection 705-115(1) (paragraph (b) of
the definition of owned deductions)
Omit “705-90(5)”, substitute “705-90(7)”.
36 Paragraph 705-115(2)(c)
Repeal the paragraph, substitute:
(c) to the extent that the expenditure reduced the undistributed profits
comprising the step 3 amount in the table in section 705-60.
37 Group heading before
section 705-120
Repeal the heading.
38 Section 705-120
Repeal the section.
39 Section 711-20 (table items 5 and
6)
Repeal the items, substitute:
|
5 |
If the amount remaining after step 4 is positive, it is the old
group’s allocable cost amount for the leaving entity. Otherwise the old
group’s allocable cost amount is nil. |
|
40 Subsection 711-20(1)
(note)
Omit “step 5”, substitute “step 4”.
41 Subsection 711-35(1)
Omit “ltax rate”, substitute “tax rate”.
42 Subsection 711-45(5)
Omit “joined group”, substitute “old
group”.
43 Section 711-50
Repeal the section.
44 Section 711-60
Repeal the section.
Income Tax Assessment Act
1997
1 Section 705-125
Repeal the link note.
2 After
Subdivision 705-A
Insert:
When a consolidated group comes into existence, the tax cost setting amount
for the assets of each entity that becomes a subsidiary member is worked out by
modifying the rules in Subdivision 705-A, so that the amount reflects the
cost to the group of acquiring the entity.
Table of sections
Application and object
705-135 Application and object of this
Subdivision
Modified application of Subdivision 705-A
705-140 Subdivision 705-A has effect with
modifications
705-145 Order in which tax cost setting amounts are to be
worked out where subsidiary members have membership interests in other
subsidiary members
705-150 Adjustment to result of step 3 in working out
allocable cost amount where pre-formation time roll-over from head company to
member of wholly-owned group
705-155 Adjustment in working out step 4 of allocable cost
amount for successive distributions through interposed entities
705-160 Adjustment to allocation of allocable cost amount to
take account of owned losses of certain entities that become subsidiary
members
705-165 Working out pre-CGT factors
where subsidiary members have membership interests in other subsidiary
members
[This is the end of the Guide.]
Application
(1) This Subdivision has effect for the head company core purposes set out
in subsection 701-1(2) if one or more entities become
*subsidiary members of a
*consolidated group at the time (the
formation time) it comes into existence as a consolidated
group.
Note: This is the first exception to Subdivision 705-A:
see paragraph 705-15(a).
Object
(2) The object of this Subdivision is to modify the rules in
Subdivision 705-A (which basically determine the tax cost setting amount
for assets of an entity joining an existing
*consolidated group) so that they have effect,
and take account of different circumstances that apply, when a consolidated
group comes into existence.
Note: The main circumstance is where one of the entities has
membership interests in another. In such a case, the order in which the rules in
Subdivision 705-A are applied will affect the tax cost setting amounts for
the assets of the entities.
(1) Subdivision 705-A has effect in relation to each entity becoming
a *subsidiary member of the
*consolidated group at the formation time in
the same way as that Subdivision has effect in relation to an entity becoming a
subsidiary member of a consolidated group in circumstances covered by that
Subdivision.
(2) However, that effect of Subdivision 705-A is subject to
modifications set out in this Subdivision.
Object
(1) The object of this section is to ensure that where, on becoming
*subsidiary members, entities hold assets
consisting of *membership interests in other
subsidiary members, the *head company’s
cost of becoming the holder of the assets of all of the entities that become
subsidiary members correctly reflects the group’s cost of acquiring the
entities.
Tax cost setting amounts to be worked out from top down
(2) If, on becoming *subsidiary members,
entities hold *membership interests in any
other entities that become subsidiary members, the
*tax cost setting amounts for the assets of
entities holding membership interests must be worked out before the tax cost
setting amounts for the assets of the entities in which the membership interests
are held.
Note: The tax cost setting amount in respect of assets of
any subsidiary member in which the head company, but no other subsidiary member,
holds membership interests can be worked out in any order in relation to the
calculations for other subsidiary members.
Tax cost setting amount for higher entity’s membership interests
to be used in working out lower entity’s tax cost setting
amount
(3) The tax cost setting amount worked out for assets of an entity
mentioned in subsection (2) consisting of
*membership interests in another such entity is
to be used as the amount for those interests under subsection 705-65(1) (step 1
of allocable cost amount) in working out the tax cost setting amount for assets
of that other entity.
Note 1: Subsection 705-65(1) adds together amounts worked
out in accordance with section 705-65 representing the cost of the
membership interests that each member of the group holds in the entity. If any
of those membership interests is held by another subsidiary member,
subsection (3) above will replace the amount otherwise applicable with the
tax cost setting amount that will have been worked out for the interests in
accordance with subsection (2) above.
Note 2: The tax cost setting amount worked out for the
membership interests has no relevance other than for the purpose mentioned in
subsection (3). This is because, under the single entity principle, intra
group membership interests are ignored while entities are members of the group.
If an entity ceases to be a member, section 701-15 and Division 711
set the tax cost of membership interests in the entity at that
time.
Value shifting etc. provisions not to apply to later CGT events
involving membership interests
(4) However, despite subsection (3), subsection 705-65(4) (which
prevents the later operation of value shifting etc. provisions) still applies to
the *membership interests.
Rights and options to acquire membership interests
(5) For the purposes of this section, if, on becoming a
*subsidiary member, an entity holds a right or
option (including a contingent right or option), created or issued by another
entity that becomes a subsidiary member at the same time, to acquire a
*membership interest in that other entity, that
right or option is treated as if it were a membership interest in that other
entity.
Object
(1) The object of this section is to ensure that, in working out the
group’s *allocable cost amount for
certain entities that become *subsidiary
members of the group at the formation time, an adjustment is made to take
account of roll-overs under Subdivision 126-B or section 160ZZO of the
Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 before the formation time.
When section applies
(2) This section applies if:
(a) before the formation time, there was a roll-over under
Subdivision 126-B or section 160ZZO of the Income Tax Assessment
Act 1936 in relation to a *CGT event (the
head company roll-over event) that happened in relation to an
asset (the head company roll-over asset),
where:
(i) an entity (the head company roll-over recipient) that
becomes a *subsidiary member of the group was
the recipient company in relation to the roll-over; and
(ii) the originating company in relation to that roll-over was the entity
that becomes the *head company of the group;
and
(b) between the roll-over and the formation time, no other CGT event
happened in relation to the head company roll-over asset:
(i) for which there was another roll-over satisfying the requirements of
paragraph (a); or
(ii) for which there was not a roll-over under Subdivision 126-B or
section 160ZZO of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; and
(c) the head company roll-over asset is not a
*pre-CGT asset at the formation time;
and
(d) the sum of the *cost bases of all of
the *head company’s
*CGT assets just before the head company
roll-over event exceeded or was less than the sum of the cost bases of all of
the head company’s CGT assets just after the head company roll-over event
(the excess or shortfall being the head company roll-over adjustment
amount).
Adjustment to result of step 3 in allocable cost amount for head company
roll-over recipient
(3) For the purpose of working out the group’s
*allocable cost amount for the head company
roll-over recipient, the result of step 3 in the table in section 705-60 is
reduced (if the head company roll-over adjustment amount is an excess), or
increased (if the head company roll-over adjustment amount is a shortfall), by
the amount worked out as follows:
where:
market value of all membership interests in head company roll-over
recipient means the *market value, at
the formation time, of all *membership
interests in the head company roll-over recipient that are held by entities that
become *members of the group at that
time.
Adjustment to result of step 3 in allocable cost amount for interposed
entity
(4) Also, if this section applies, for the purpose of working out the
group’s *allocable cost amount for any
entity (the target entity) that:
(a) becomes a *subsidiary member of the
group at the formation time; and
(b) is interposed at that time between the
*head company and the head company roll-over
recipient; and
(c) is the first or only such interposed entity;
the result of step 3 in the table in section 705-60 is reduced (if the
head company roll-over adjustment amount is an excess), or increased (if the
head company roll-over adjustment amount is a shortfall), by the amount worked
out as follows:
where:
market value of all membership interests in head company roll-over
recipient has the same meaning as in subsection (3).
market value of head company’s indirect membership interests in
head company roll-over recipient means so much of the
*market value, at the formation time, of the
*head company’s
*membership interests in the target entity as
is attributable to membership interests that the entity holds directly, or
indirectly through other interposed entities that become
*subsidiary members of the group at the
formation time, in the head company roll-over recipient.
Note: If under subsection (3) or (4) the amount by
which the result of step 3 is to be reduced exceeds that result, the excess is
treated as a capital gain of the head company.
Object
(1) The object of this section is to ensure that, in working out the
group’s *allocable cost amount for
entities that become *subsidiary members of the
group at the formation time, there is only one reduction under step 4 in the
table in section 705-60 (about pre-formation time distributions out of
certain profits) for distributions of the same profits.
When section applies
(2) This section applies if, apart from this section:
(a) in working out the group’s
*allocable cost amount for an entity that
becomes a *subsidiary member of the group at
the formation time, there would be a reduction under step 4 in the table in
section 705-60 for a distribution (the first distribution)
made by the entity; and
(b) in working out the group’s
*allocable cost amount for a second entity that
becomes a *subsidiary member of the group at
that time, there would also be a reduction under that step for any of the first
distribution that the second entity successively distributed as mentioned in
paragraph 705-95(a).
No step 4 reduction in respect of successive distribution of amount for
which there has already been a step 4 reduction
(3) If this section applies, there is no reduction as mentioned in
paragraph (2)(b).
Object
(1) The object of this section is to prevent a distortion under
section 705-35 in the allocation of
*allocable cost amount to an entity that
becomes a *subsidiary member of the group where
that entity has *membership interests in
another entity that has certain tax losses when it becomes a subsidiary
member.
Adjustment to allocation of allocable cost amount
(2) If:
(a) an entity becomes a *subsidiary
member of the group at the formation time; and
(b) the entity has *membership interests
in a second entity that becomes a subsidiary member of the group at that time;
and
(c) in working out the group’s
*allocable cost amount for the second entity an
amount is required to be subtracted (the loss subtraction amount)
under step 5 in the table in section 705-60 (about losses accruing before
becoming a subsidiary member of the group);
then, for the purposes of working out under section 705-35 the
*tax cost setting amount for the assets of the
first entity, the *market value of the first
entity’s membership interests in the second entity is increased by the
first entity’s interest in the loss subtraction amount (see
subsection (3)).
First entity’s interest in loss subtraction amount
(3) The first entity’s interest in the loss subtraction amount is
worked out using the formula:
Object
(1) The object of this section is to ensure that where, on becoming
*subsidiary members, entities hold
*membership interests in other subsidiary
members, the pre-CGT status of membership interests held by the
*head company, and not the pre-CGT status of
membership interests held by other entities, is used to work out the
*pre-CGT factor under section 705-125 for
assets of the other subsidiary members.
Pre-CGT factor to be worked out from top down
(2) If, on becoming *subsidiary members,
entities hold *membership interests in any
other entities that become subsidiary members, the
*pre-CGT factor for the assets of entities
holding membership interests must be worked out before the pre-CGT factor for
the assets of the entities in which the membership interests are held.
[The next Division is Division 707.]
Income Tax Assessment Act
1997
1 Section 705-40
Repeal the section, substitute:
(1) The *tax cost setting amount for a
reset cost base asset that is *trading stock, a
*depreciating asset or a
*revenue asset must not exceed the greater
of:
(a) the asset’s *market value;
and
(b) the joining entity’s
*terminating value for the asset.
(2) If subsection (1) reduces the asset’s
*tax cost setting amount, the amount of the
reduction is allocated among the other reset cost base assets (including other
*trading stock,
*depreciating assets and
*revenue assets) other than excluded assets, so
as to increase their tax cost setting amounts, in accordance with the
principles set out in subsection (3).
Note: If any of the amount of the reduction cannot be
allocated, it is instead treated as a capital loss of the head
company.
(3) These are the principles:
(a) the allocation is to be in proportion to the
*market values of the assets;
(b) the amount allocated to an item of
*trading stock, to a
*depreciating asset or to a
*revenue asset must not cause its
*tax cost setting amount to contravene
subsection (1);
(c) any of the amount that cannot be allocated is to be reallocated, to
the maximum extent possible, among the remaining reset cost base assets (other
than excluded assets) by applying this subsection a further one or more
times.
Income Tax Assessment Act
1997
1 Paragraph 709-60(3)(c)
Omit “item 6 of the table in section 160-115”,
substitute “item 5 of the table in
section 205-15”.
2 Subsection 709-70(2)
(note)
Omit “section 160-115”, substitute
“section 205-15”.
3 Subsection 709-75(2)
(note)
Omit “section 160-130”, substitute
“section 205-30”.
Income Tax Assessment Act
1997
1 Section 711-70 (link
note)
Repeal the link note, substitute:
[The next Division is Division 717.]
2 After Division 711
Insert:
Table of Subdivisions
717-A Foreign tax credits
717-D Attributable income: entry rules
717-E Attributable income: exit rules
If an entity becomes a subsidiary member of a consolidated group, its
excess foreign tax credits are transferred to the head company of the group, for
use in later income years. The head company receives any foreign tax credits
that arise because the entity pays foreign tax while it is a subsidiary member
of the group.
Table of sections
Objects
717-5 Objects of this Subdivision
Foreign tax on amounts in head company’s assessable
income
717-10 Head company taken to be liable for subsidiary
member’s foreign tax
Foreign tax on amounts not in head company’s assessable
income
717-15 Transferring subsidiary member’s excess foreign
tax credits from earlier years to head company
717-20 Where entity not subsidiary member for whole of
income year
[This is the end of the Guide.]
(1) The main objects of this Subdivision are set out in
subsections (2), (3) and (4).
(2) The first of those objects is to allow the
*head company of a
*consolidated group to get the benefit of
foreign tax paid in respect of foreign income (within the meaning of the
Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) included in the head company’s
assessable income because another entity is or was a
*subsidiary member of the group.
(3) The second of those objects is to allow the
*head company of a
*consolidated group to apply, in relation to an
income year, *excess foreign tax credits of an
entity (the joining entity) that becomes a
*subsidiary member of the group at a time (the
joining time) if:
(a) the income year starts after the joining time; and
(b) those excess foreign tax credits are from an income year ending before
the joining time.
(4) The third of those objects is to prevent an entity (other than the
*head company of the group) from applying
*excess foreign tax credits mentioned in
paragraph (3)(b) to increase its own credits in respect of foreign
tax.
(1) This section operates if:
(a) an entity was a *subsidiary member of
a *consolidated group for all or part of an
income year; and
(b) the assessable income of the *head
company of the group for that income year included foreign income (within the
meaning of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936); and
(c) the entity paid, and was personally liable for, foreign tax (within
the meaning of that Act) in respect of that foreign income (whether or not the
entity was a subsidiary member of the group at the time of payment).
(2) Section 160AF of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936
operates as if:
(a) the *head company had paid and been
personally liable for the foreign tax; and
(b) the entity had not paid and had not been personally liable for the
foreign tax.
Note: Section 160AF of the Income Tax Assessment Act
1936 provides a foreign tax credit (which is a tax offset) of an amount that
depends on:
(a) foreign tax that an entity paid, and was personally
liable for, in respect of foreign income included in the entity’s
assessable income; and
(b) the amount of Australian tax payable (worked out as
described in that section) in respect of the foreign income.
(3) This section does not limit the operation of section 160AF of the
Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.
(1) This section operates for the purposes of section 160AFE of the
Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 in relation to an income year
if:
(a) an entity (the joining entity) becomes a
*subsidiary member of a
*consolidated group at a time (the
joining time); and
(b) the joining time is:
(i) before the start of that income year; and
(ii) after the start of an earlier income year (the earlier
year); and
(c) the joining entity has *excess
foreign tax credits (the transfer credits) from the earlier
year.
(2) For those purposes:
(a) the *head company of the group is
taken to have the transfer credits; and
(b) the joining entity is taken not to have the transfer credits;
and
(c) if, apart from paragraph (a), the head company has
*excess foreign tax credits from the earlier
year—the transfer credits are taken to be included in those excess foreign
tax credits.
(3) Subsection (2) also has effect for the purposes of a subsequent
operation of this section.
Example: An entity becomes a subsidiary member of a
consolidated group in an income year. This section operates in relation to a
later income year so that the entity no longer has the transfer credits
mentioned in paragraph (1)(c) (see paragraph (2)(b)). The entity later
leaves the group and becomes a subsidiary member of a second consolidated group.
In a subsequent operation of this section in relation to the head company of the
second group, the entity will not have those transfer credits, because of the
previous operation of paragraph (2)(b).
(4) This section operates separately in relation to each class of foreign
income (within the meaning of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936)
identified in subsection 160AF(7) of that Act, as if:
(a) the *head company’s foreign
income of that class for an income year were the whole of the head
company’s foreign income for that year; and
(b) the joining entity’s foreign income of that class for an income
year were the whole of the joining entity’s foreign income for that
year.
(1) This section operates if:
(a) an entity (the joining entity) is a
*subsidiary member of a
*consolidated group for some but not all of an
income year (the joining year); and
(b) there are one or more periods in the joining year (each of which is a
non-membership period) during which the entity is not a subsidiary
member of any *consolidated group.
Note: Section 701-30 treats each non-membership period
as a separate income year for some purposes.
(2) Subsection (3) has effect for the purposes of section 701-30
in relation to the joining entity.
(3) In working out amounts for the joining entity under subsection
701-30(3) in relation to each non-membership period, make these
assumptions:
(a) if the joining year starts at the same time as the earliest of those
non-membership periods:
(i) subsection 160AFE(2) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936
operates in relation to the joining entity for that non-membership period;
and
(ii) subsection 160AFE(2) of that Act does not operate in relation
to the joining entity for the later non-membership periods (if any);
(b) otherwise—subsection 160AFE(2) of that Act does not
operate in relation to the joining entity for any of the non-membership
periods.
(4) Subsection (5) has effect for the purposes of section 717-15
in relation to the *head company of the
*consolidated group for a later income
year.
(5) In working out the amount (if any) of the joining entity’s
transfer credits (within the meaning of paragraph 717-15(1)(c)) from the joining
year, do not include the amount of the joining entity’s
*excess foreign tax credits from a
non-membership period (if any) that ends at the same time the joining year
ends.
[The next Subdivision is Subdivision 717-D.]
Each attribution surplus, attributed tax account surplus, FIF attribution
surplus and FIF attributed tax account surplus relating to a company that
becomes a subsidiary member of a consolidated group is transferred to the head
company of the group.
Table of sections
Object
717-205 Object of this Subdivision
Transfers
717-210 Attribution surpluses
717-215 Attributed tax account surpluses
717-220 FIF attribution surpluses
717-225 FIF attributed tax account
surpluses
717-230 Calculating FIF income where a company joins the
group
[This is the end of the Guide.]
The main object of this Subdivision is to avoid double taxation by
transferring from a company (the joining company) that becomes a
*subsidiary member of a
*consolidated group at a time (the
joining time) to the *head
company of the group the benefit of each of these:
(a) the attribution surplus (if any) for an attribution account entity
(within the meaning of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936)
in relation to the joining company just before the joining time;
(b) the attributed tax account surplus (if any) for an attribution account
entity (within the meaning of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act
1936) in relation to the joining company just before the joining
time;
(c) the FIF attribution surplus (if any) for a FIF attribution account
entity (within the meaning of Part XI of the Income Tax Assessment Act
1936) in relation to the joining company just before the joining
time;
(d) the FIF attributed tax account surplus (if any) for a
*FIF (within the meaning of Part XI of the
Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) in relation to the joining company just
before the joining time.
(1) This section operates for the purposes of Part X of the Income
Tax Assessment Act 1936 if:
(a) a company (the joining company) becomes a
*subsidiary member of a
*consolidated group at a time (the
joining time); and
(b) just before the joining time there was an attribution surplus for an
attribution account entity in relation to the joining company for the purposes
of that Part; and
(c) just before the joining time the joining company’s attribution
account percentage in relation to the attribution account entity for the
purposes of that Part was more than nil.
Credit in relation to the head company
(2) An attribution credit arises at the joining time for the attribution
account entity in relation to the *head company
of the group. The credit is equal to the attribution surplus.
Debit in relation to the joining company
(3) An attribution debit arises at the joining time for the attribution
account entity in relation to the joining company. The debit is equal to the
attribution surplus.
Section 717-210 also operates as described in the table:
|
Transfer of attributed tax account surpluses by
section 717-210 |
||
|---|---|---|
|
Item |
Section 717-210 operates in relation to this thing (within the
meaning of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act
1936): |
In the same way as it operates in relation to this thing: |
|
1 |
Attributed tax account surplus |
Attribution surplus |
|
2 |
Attributed tax account credit |
Attribution credit |
|
3 |
Attributed tax account debit |
Attribution debit |
Section 717-210 also operates for the purposes of Part XI of
the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 as described in the table:
|
Transfer of FIF attribution surpluses by
section 717-210 |
||
|---|---|---|
|
Item |
Section 717-210 operates in relation to this thing (within the
meaning of Part XI of the Income Tax Assessment Act
1936): |
In the same way as it operates in relation to this thing: |
|
1 |
FIF attribution surplus |
Attribution surplus |
|
2 |
FIF attribution account entity |
Attribution account entity |
|
3 |
FIF attribution account percentage |
Attribution account percentage |
|
4 |
FIF attribution credit |
Attribution credit |
|
5 |
FIF attribution debit |
Attribution debit |
Note: Section 717-230 may affect the calculation of the
FIF attribution surplus for the FIF attribution account entity in relation to
the joining company just before the joining time.
Section 717-210 also operates for the purposes of Part XI of
the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 as described in the table:
|
Transfer of FIF attributed tax account surpluses by
section 717-210 |
||
|---|---|---|
|
Item |
Section 717-210 operates in relation to this thing (within the
meaning of Part XI of the Income Tax Assessment Act
1936): |
In the same way as it operates in relation to this thing: |
|
1 |
FIF attributed tax account surplus |
Attribution surplus |
|
2 |
*FIF |
Attribution account entity |
|
3 |
FIF attribution account percentage |
Attribution account percentage |
|
4 |
FIF attributed tax account credit |
Attribution credit |
|
5 |
FIF attributed tax account debit |
Attribution debit |
Note: Section 717-230 may affect the calculation of the
FIF attributed tax account surplus for the FIF in relation to the joining
company just before the joining time.
(1) This section modifies the operation of Part XI of the Income
Tax Assessment Act 1936 if:
(a) a company (the joining company) becomes a
*subsidiary member of a
*consolidated group at a time (the
joining time); and
(b) for the purposes of that Part, the FIF attribution account percentage
of the joining company in relation to a FIF attribution account entity that is a
*FIF is more than nil at the time (the
surplus time) just before the joining time.
(2) That Part operates in relation to the joining company as if a notional
accounting period of the *FIF in relation to
the joining company ended at the time (the credit/debit time) just
before the surplus time.
(3) That Part operates in relation to the joining company as if subsection
485(3) of that Act provided that the operative provision applied to the joining
company in relation to the *FIF in respect of
the notional accounting period of that FIF that ended in the year of income that
included the credit/debit time.
(4) Paragraph 538(2)(d) of that Act operates in relation to the
*head company of the
*consolidated group in relation to the
*FIF in respect of the notional accounting
period of that FIF that included the joining time as if:
(a) the head company had acquired the interest or interests mentioned in
that paragraph during that period (so far as those interests are held by the
head company because the joining company became a
*subsidiary member of the group); and
(b) the amount or value of the consideration paid or given by the head
company in respect of the acquisition was equal to the amount worked out under
paragraph 538(2)(a) of that Act in relation to the joining company in relation
to the FIF in respect of the notional accounting period mentioned in
subsection (2) of this section.
Note: The modifications made by this
section:
(a) apply if a company joins a consolidated group during a
notional accounting period of a FIF in which the company has an interest;
and
(b) allow the appropriate calculation of amounts attributed
under FIF rules to the head company and joining company before and after the
joining time; and
(c) mean that foreign investment fund income that accrued to
the joining company from the FIF will be included in the joining company’s
assessable income and will give rise to a FIF attribution credit, and may also
give rise to a FIF attribution debit, in relation to the joining company;
and
(d) mean that the FIF attribution surplus and the FIF
attributed tax account surplus for the FIF attribution account entity in
relation to the joining company at the surplus time will take account of credits
and debits arising at the credit/debit time and earlier.
Each attribution surplus, attributed tax account surplus, FIF attribution
surplus and FIF attributed tax account surplus relating to a company that ceases
to be a subsidiary member of a consolidated group is transferred to that company
from the head company of the group.
Table of sections
Object
717-240 Object of this Subdivision
Transfer of Part X surpluses
717-245 Attribution surpluses
717-250 Attributed tax account surpluses
Transfer of Part XI surpluses
717-255 FIF attribution surpluses
717-260 FIF attributed tax account
surpluses
717-265 Calculating FIF income where a company leaves the
group
[This is the end of the Guide.]
The main object of this Subdivision is to avoid double taxation by
transferring from the *head company of a
*consolidated group to a company (the
leaving company) that ceases to be a
*subsidiary member of the group at a time (the
leaving time) the benefit of each of these surpluses (to the
extent that each surplus can be attributed to the leaving company):
(a) the attribution surplus (if any) for an attribution account entity
(within the meaning of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936)
in relation to the head company just before the leaving time;
(b) the attributed tax account surplus (if any) for an attribution account
entity (within the meaning of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act
1936) in relation to the head company just before the leaving
time;
(c) the FIF attribution surplus (if any) for a FIF attribution account
entity (within the meaning of Part XI of the Income Tax Assessment Act
1936) in relation to the head company just before the leaving
time;
(d) the FIF attributed tax account surplus (if any) for a
*FIF (within the meaning of Part XI of the
Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) in relation to the head company just
before the leaving time.
(1) This section operates for the purposes of Part X of the Income
Tax Assessment Act 1936 if:
(a) a company (the leaving company) ceases to be a
*subsidiary member of a
*consolidated group at a time (the
leaving time); and
(b) just before the leaving time there was, for the purposes of that Part,
an attribution surplus for an attribution account entity in relation to the
*head company of the group; and
(c) at the leaving time the leaving company’s attribution account
percentage in relation to the attribution account entity for the purposes of
that Part is more than nil.
Credit in relation to leaving company
(2) An attribution credit arises at the leaving time for the attribution
account entity in relation to the leaving company. The credit is the amount
worked out under subsection (4).
Debit in relation to head company
(3) An attribution debit arises at the leaving time for the attribution
account entity in relation to the company that was the
*head company of the group just before the
leaving time. The debit is the amount worked out under
subsection (4).
Amount of credit and debit
(4) The amount of the credit and debit is worked out using the
formula:
Section 717-245 also operates as described in the table:
|
Transfer of attributed tax account surpluses by
section 717-245 |
||
|---|---|---|
|
Item |
Section 717-245 operates in relation to this thing (within the
meaning of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act
1936): |
In the same way as it operates in relation to this thing: |
|
1 |
Attributed tax account surplus |
Attribution surplus |
|
2 |
Attributed tax account credit |
Attribution credit |
|
3 |
Attributed tax account debit |
Attribution debit |
Section 717-245 also operates for the purposes of Part XI of
the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 as described in the table:
|
Transfer of FIF attribution surpluses by
section 717-245 |
||
|---|---|---|
|
Item |
Section 717-245 operates in relation to this thing (within the
meaning of Part XI of the Income Tax Assessment Act
1936): |
In the same way as it operates in relation to this thing: |
|
1 |
FIF attribution surplus |
Attribution surplus |
|
2 |
FIF attribution account entity |
Attribution account entity |
|
3 |
FIF attribution account percentage |
Attribution account percentage |
|
4 |
FIF attribution credit |
Attribution credit |
|
5 |
FIF attribution debit |
Attribution debit |
Note: Section 717-265 may affect the calculation of the
FIF attribution surplus for the FIF attribution account entity in relation to
the head company just before the leaving time.
Section 717-245 also operates for the purposes of Part XI of
the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 as described in the table:
|
Transfer of FIF attributed tax account surpluses by
section 717-245 |
||
|---|---|---|
|
Item |
Section 717-245 operates in relation to this thing (within the
meaning of Part XI of the Income Tax Assessment Act
1936): |
In the same way as it operates in relation to this thing: |
|
1 |
FIF attributed tax account surplus |
Attribution surplus |
|
2 |
*FIF |
Attribution account entity |
|
3 |
FIF attribution account percentage |
Attribution account percentage |
|
4 |
FIF attributed tax account credit |
Attribution credit |
|
5 |
FIF attributed tax account debit |
Attribution debit |
Note: Section 717-265 may affect the calculation of the
FIF attributed tax account surplus for the FIF in relation to the head company
just before the leaving time.
(1) This section modifies the operation of Part XI of the Income
Tax Assessment Act 1936 in relation to a company (the transferor
company) if:
(a) the transferor company is the *head
company of a *consolidated group at a time (the
surplus time); and
(b) for the purposes of that Part, the FIF attribution account percentage
of the transferor company in relation to a FIF attribution account entity that
is a *FIF is more than nil at the surplus time;
and
(c) another company (the leaving company) ceases to be a
*subsidiary member of the group at the time
(the leaving time) just after the surplus time; and
(d) for the purposes of that Part, the leaving company’s FIF
attribution account percentage in relation to that FIF attribution account
entity is more than nil at the leaving time.
(2) That Part operates in relation to the transferor company as if a
notional accounting period of the *FIF in
relation to the transferor company ended at the time (the credit/debit
time) just before the surplus time.
(3) That Part operates in relation to the transferor company as if the
next notional accounting period of the *FIF in
relation to the transferor company started at the surplus time and continued
until whichever of these times occurs first:
(a) the time when a notional accounting period of the FIF in relation to
the transferor company would have ended apart from this section;
(b) the time when the period ends because of another application of this
section.
(4) That Part operates in relation to the transferor company as if
subsection 485(3) of that Act provided that the operative provision applied to
the transferor company in relation to the *FIF
in respect of the notional accounting period of that FIF that ended in the year
of income that included the credit/debit time.
(5) Paragraph 538(2)(d) of that Act operates in relation to the leaving
company in relation to the *FIF in respect of
the notional accounting period of that FIF that included the leaving time as
if:
(a) the leaving company had acquired the interest or interests mentioned
in that paragraph during that period (so far as those interests are held by the
leaving company because it ceased to be a
*subsidiary member of the group); and
(b) the amount or value of the consideration paid or given by the leaving
company in respect of the acquisition was equal to the amount worked out under
paragraph 538(2)(a) of that Act in relation to the transferor company in
relation to the FIF in respect of the notional accounting period mentioned in
subsection (2) of this section.
Note: The modifications made by this
section:
(a) apply if a company leaves a consolidated group during a
notional accounting period of a FIF in which the company has an interest;
and
(b) allow the appropriate calculation of amounts attributed
under FIF rules to the transferor company and leaving company before and after
the leaving time; and
(c) mean that foreign investment fund income that accrued to
the transferor company from the FIF will be included in the transferor
company’s assessable income and will give rise to a FIF attribution
credit, and may also give rise to a FIF attribution debit, in relation to the
transferor company; and
(d) mean that the FIF attribution surplus and the FIF
attributed tax account surplus for the FIF attribution account entity in
relation to the transferor company at the surplus time will take account of
credits and debits arising at the credit/debit time and
earlier.
[The next Division is Division 719.]
Income Tax (Transitional
Provisions) Act 1997
1 Section 700-1
Repeal the section, substitute:
Part 3-90 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997, as
inserted by the New Business Tax System (Consolidation) Bill (No. 1)
2002 and amended by the New Business Tax System (Consolidation, Value
Shifting, Demergers and Other Measures) Act 2002, applies on and after
1 July 2002.
2 After Division 700
Insert:
Table of Subdivisions
701-A Preliminary
701-B Modified application of provisions
Table of sections
701-1 Transitional group and transitional
entity
701-5 Chosen transitional entity
701-10 Interpretation
Group formed on 1 July 2002
(1) If a consolidated group came into existence on 1 July
2002:
(a) the group is a transitional group; and
(b) each entity that became a subsidiary member of the group on the day it
came into existence is a transitional entity.
Group formed after 1 July 2002 but before 1 July
2003
(2) If a consolidated group came into existence after 1 July 2002 but
before 1 July 2003:
(a) the group is a transitional group if at least one entity
that became a subsidiary member of the group on the day the group came into
existence is a transitional entity; and
(b) an entity is a transitional entity if:
(i) at no time after 1 July 2002 and before the group came into
existence was the entity a wholly-owned subsidiary of the entity (the
future head company) that became the head company of the group;
or
(ii) at some time during that period, the entity was a wholly-owned
subsidiary of the future head company and it remained such from the earliest
time after 1 July 2002 when it was a wholly-owned subsidiary of the future
head company until the group came into existence.
Group formed during financial year starting on 1 July
2003
(3) If a consolidated group came into existence during the financial year
starting on 1 July 2003:
(a) the group is a transitional group if at least one entity
that became a subsidiary member of the group on the day the group came into
existence is a transitional entity; and
(b) an entity is a transitional entity if:
(i) just before 1 July 2003, it was a wholly-owned subsidiary of the
future head company; and
(ii) it remained such from the earliest time after 1 July 2002 when
it was a wholly-owned subsidiary of the future head company until the group came
into existence.
(1) If a group is a transitional group, its head company may choose that
the group’s transitional entity is a chosen transitional
entity, or one or more of the group’s transitional entities are
chosen transitional entities.
Period for making choice
(2) The choice must be made by the end of the period described in
subsection 703-50(3) for giving the Commissioner the choice under
section 703-50 that the group is taken to be consolidated.
Choice is irrevocable
(3) The choice cannot be revoked.
A reference in this Division to:
(a) a provision of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997; or
(b) a consolidated group’s allocable cost amount for an
entity;
is a reference to that provision as it applies to the group, or to the
allocable cost amount as it is worked out for the entity, in accordance with
Subdivision 705-B of that Act and with this Division.
Table of sections
701-15 Tax cost and trading stock value not set for assets
of chosen transitional entities
701-20 Working out allocable cost amount on formation for
subsidiary members other than chosen transitional entities
701-25 No operation of value shifting and loss transfer
provisions to membership interests in chosen transitional
entities
701-30 Undistributed, unfrankable pre-formation profits of
non-chosen transitional entities—adjustment to allocable cost amount and
tax cost setting amount reduction for over-depreciated assets
701-35 CGT event for pre-formation roll-over after
16 May 2002 to be disregarded if cost base etc. would be
different
701-40 When entity leaves transitional group, head company
may choose, for purposes of transitional group’s allocable cost amount, to
increase terminating values of over-depreciated assets
701-45 When entity leaves transitional group, head company
may choose, for purposes of transitional group’s allocable cost amount, to
use formation time market values, instead of terminating values, for certain
pre-CGT assets
Section 701-10 (cost to head company of assets that entity brings
into group) and subsection 701-35(4) (setting value of trading stock at
tax-neutral amount) do not apply to the assets of a chosen transitional
entity.
Note: The fact that the head company inherits the
entity’s history under section 701-5 when the entity becomes a
subsidiary member of the group means that the entity’s assets would be
treated as having the same cost as they would for the entity at that
time.
When section applies
(1) This section applies if any of the transitional entities in the
transitional group is a chosen transitional entity.
Allocable cost amount to be worked out in special way
(2) If this section applies, the group’s allocable cost amount for
each of the entities, other than a chosen transitional entity, that become
subsidiary members when the group comes into existence (each of which is a
non-chosen subsidiary) is worked out in a special way.
How to work out allocable cost amount
(3) The allocable cost amount for each non-chosen subsidiary is the sum
of:
(a) the head company adjusted allocable amount for the non-chosen
subsidiary (see subsection (4)); and
(b) for each sub-group (see subsection (6)) that exists in relation
to the non-chosen subsidiary—the sub-group’s notional allocable cost
amount (see subsection(5)) for the non-chosen subsidiary.
Head company adjusted allocable amount
(4) The head company adjusted allocable amount for the
non-chosen subsidiary is the amount that would be the transitional group’s
allocable cost amount for that entity if;
(a) the holding of all sub-group membership interests were disregarded;
and
(b) only the following proportion of each of the step 2 to step 7 amounts
in the table in section 705-60 was taken into account:

where:
market value of all membership interests in non-chosen subsidiary
means the market value, at the time the group comes into existence, of
all membership interests in the non-chosen subsidiary that are held by entities
that become members of the group at that time.
market value of head company’s direct and indirect membership
interests in non-chosen subsidiary means the market value, at the time
the group comes into existence, of all membership interests in the non-chosen
subsidiary that the head company holds directly or indirectly through interposed
entities that become subsidiary members of the group at that time and are not
included in any sub-group in relation to the non-chosen subsidiary.
Sub-group’s notional allocable cost amount
(5) For each sub-group that exists in relation to the non-chosen
subsidiary, there is a sub-group’s notional allocable cost
amount. That amount is the amount that would be a consolidated
group’s allocable cost amount for the non-chosen subsidiary if:
(a) the consolidated group came into existence at the same time as the
transitional group and consisted only of the non-chosen subsidiary and the
entities comprising the sub-group; and
(b) the chosen transitional entity in the sub-group were the head company
of the consolidated group; and
(c) the only membership interests that any entity in the sub-group held in
any other member of the consolidated group were the sub-group membership
interests (see subsection (6)) in relation to the sub-group; and
(d) only the following proportion of each of the step 2 to step 7 amounts
in the table in section 705-60 was taken into account:

where:
market value of all membership interests in non-chosen subsidiary
means the market value, at the time the group comes into existence, of
all membership interests in the non-chosen subsidiary that are held by entities
that become members of the group at that time.
market value of chosen transitional entity’s direct and
indirect membership interests in non-chosen subsidiary means the market
value, at the time the group comes into existence, of all membership interests
in the non-chosen subsidiary that the chosen transitional entity holds directly
or indirectly through interposed entities that are included in the
sub-group.
Sub-group and sub-group membership interests
(6) If a chosen transitional entity holds membership interests in a
non-chosen subsidiary, either directly or indirectly through one or more other
entities, each of which is a non-chosen subsidiary:
(a) the chosen transitional entity and each interposed non-chosen
subsidiary comprise a sub-group in relation to the non-chosen
subsidiary (unless the non-chosen subsidiary is included in a sub-group in
relation to another non-chosen subsidiary); and
(b) the following membership interests are the sub-group membership
interests in relation to the sub-group:
(i) the membership interests that the chosen transitional entity holds
directly in the non-chosen subsidiary or in any of the interposed non-chosen
subsidiaries;
(ii) the membership interests that each interposed non-chosen subsidiary
holds directly in the non-chosen subsidiary or in any of the other interposed
non-chosen subsidiaries.
If any provision of this Act would, because of events that happened
before the time the transitional group came into existence, apply to a CGT event
that happens after that time to change the cost base or reduced cost base of
the members’ membership interests in a chosen transitional entity, the
provision does not so apply.
Note: For example, such a provision could otherwise apply
where a loss transfer or value shift involving the entity has
occurred.
Application of section to non-chosen transitional entities where
transitional group formed before 1 July 2003
(1) This section applies if the transitional group comes into existence
before 1 July 2003. It applies to each transitional entity in the
transitional group, other than a chosen transitional entity. This is so even if
there are no chosen transitional entities at all.
Increase in step 3 of allocable cost amount on group
formation
(2) The amount to be added under section 705-90 (step 3 of allocable
cost amount) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 in working out the
transitional group’s allocable cost amount for the transitional entity is
increased by the additional undistributed profits (the step 3 unfrankable
profits increase) that would form part of the step 3 amount under that
section if:
(a) subsections (3) and (4), and paragraph (6)(b), of that
section were disregarded; and
(b) it were a requirement of that section that, if any additional
undistributed profits resulting from paragraph (a) of this subsection were
distributed as dividends just before the group came into existence, the head
company and each other transitional entity interposed between the head company
and the transitional entity would be entitled to a rebate of income tax under
section 46 or 46A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 on the
dividends.
Increase in tax deferral amount in relation to over-depreciated
assets
(3) The tax deferral amount for the purposes of applying
section 705-50 (reduction in tax cost setting amount for over-depreciated
assets) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 in relation to an asset of
the transitional entity that becomes that of the head company under subsection
701-1(1) (the single entity rule) of that Act when the transitional group comes
into existence is increased by the amount worked out under subsection (4)
of this section.
Amount of increase in tax deferral amount
(4) The increase is equal to the amount that would have been the step 3
unfrankable profits increase if the undistributed profits constituting that
increase were also required to satisfy the following requirements:
(a) the profits were not subject to income tax because of deductions for
the asset’s decline in value;
(b) the decline in value represented the over-depreciation of the
asset;
(c) the deductions for the decline in value do not form part of a tax loss
covered by the step 5 amount mentioned in step 5 in the table in
section 705-60 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 in working out
the transitional group’s allocable cost amount for the transitional
entity.
If:
(a) after 16 May 2002 and before the transitional group came into
existence, a CGT event happened in relation to an asset for which there
was:
(i) a roll-over under Subdivision 126-B of the Income Tax
Assessment Act 1997; or
(ii) roll-over relief under section 40-340 of that Act in a case
covered by item 4 of the table in subsection (1) of that section;
and
(b) the cost base or reduced cost base of that asset or any other asset
that:
(i) became an asset of the head company when the transitional group came
into existence because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) of that Act
applies; or
(ii) was otherwise an asset of the head company at that time;
differs at that time from what it would have been if the roll-over had
not occurred or there had been no such roll-over relief;
then Part 3-90 of the Income Tax Assessment 1997 applies as if
the CGT event had not happened.
(1) This section applies if an entity ceases to be a subsidiary member of
the transitional group and the requirements of subsections (2) to (5) are
satisfied.
Asset held at leaving time
(2) Just before the entity ceases to be a subsidiary member, it must,
disregarding subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) of the Income Tax
Assessment Act 1997, hold an asset.
Reduction of asset’s tax cost setting amount for
over-depreciation
(3) When the transitional group came into existence:
(a) the asset must have become that of the head company of the
transitional group because subsection 701-1(1) of that Act applied in relation
to a transitional entity; and
(b) section 705-50 of that Act must have reduced by an amount (the
reduction amount) the tax cost setting amount for the
asset.
Asset held continuously within group
(4) The asset must, disregarding subsection 701-1(1) of that Act, have
been held at all times by the head company or a subsidiary member of the
transitional group from when the transitional group came into existence until
the entity ceases to be a subsidiary member of the transitional group.
Head company’s advice to leaving entity
(5) Before the entity ceases to be a subsidiary member of the transitional
group, the head company must have advised the entity of the amount that the head
company proposes to choose under subsection (6) of this section in relation
to the asset.
Note: This information would need to be known by the entity
if it later becomes a subsidiary member of another consolidated group and still
holds the asset. This is because subsection 705-50(5) of the Income Tax
Assessment Act 1997 requires a reduction in the tax cost setting amount for
the asset on joining that other group and the amount chosen by the head company
under this section is relevant to working out that reduction.
Head company’s choice
(6) If this section applies, the head company may, in relation to the
entity’s ceasing to be a subsidiary member, choose that the terminating
value for the asset, that is to be used in applying step 1 of the table
in section 711-20 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997, is
increased by so much of the reduction amount as the head company
chooses.
(1) This section applies if:
(a) an entity ceases to be a subsidiary member of the transitional group;
and
(b) just before the transitional group came into existence, the entity
that became the head company held a pre-CGT asset; and
(c) that holding of the asset did not occur as a result of a CGT
event:
(i) for which there was a roll-over under Subdivision 126-B of the
Income Tax Assessment Act 1997; and
(ii) that occurred after 11.45 am by legal time in the Australian Capital
Territory on 21 September 1999; and
(d) just before the entity ceases to be a subsidiary member of the group,
the asset is still a pre-CGT asset and is held by the head company only because
the entity is taken by subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) of the
Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 to be a part of the head
company.
(2) If this section applies, the head company may, in relation to the
entity’s ceasing to be a subsidiary member, choose that the terminating
value for the asset, that is to be used in applying step 1 of the table in
section 711-20 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997, is equal to
its market value just before the transitional group came into
existence.
Table of sections
702-1 Modified application of section 40-77 of this Act
to assets that an entity brings into a consolidated group
702-5 Modified application of subsection 40-285(6) of this
Act after entity brings assets into consolidated group
(1) This section applies if:
(a) an entity becomes a subsidiary member of a consolidated group;
and
(b) just before it does so, section 40-77 of this Act applies to an
asset that it holds.
(2) For so long as the asset continues to be:
(a) an asset of the head company because subsection 701-1(1) (the single
entity rule) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 applies; or
(b) an asset of another entity, where it became such an asset as a result
of that subsection ceasing to apply on the entity ceasing to be a subsidiary
member of the group;
then, despite certain provisions of that Act applying, in accordance with
subsection 701-55(2) of that Act, as if the asset were acquired for a payment
equal to its tax cost setting amount:
(c) subsection 40-77(1) continues to apply to the asset; and
Note: This means that Division 40 of the Income Tax
Assessment Act 1997 continues not to apply to an asset that is a mining,
quarrying or prospecting right.
(d) subsection 40-77(2) continues to apply to the asset, but applies as if
the reference in that subsection to the cost of the asset were a reference to
the cost worked out on the basis that the asset were acquired for a payment
equal to its tax cost setting amount; and
(e) subsection 40-77(3) continues to apply to the asset, but applies as if
the reference in that subsection to the amount included in assessable income
under subsection 40-285(1) of that Act were a reference to the amount so worked
out on the basis that the asset were acquired for a payment equal to its tax
cost setting amount.
If:
(a) an entity becomes a subsidiary member of a consolidated group;
and
(b) because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) of the Income
Tax Assessment Act 1997 applies, an asset of the entity becomes an asset of
the head company of the group; and
(c) a balancing adjustment event happens in relation to the asset while it
is an asset of the head company;
subsection 40-285(6) of this Act (about reducing the amount included in
assessable income for a balancing adjustment event) applies as if the cost of
the asset were equal to the tax cost setting amount applicable in relation to
the asset for the purposes of having its tax cost set by section 701-10
(cost to head company of assets that entity brings into group) of the Income
Tax Assessment Act 1997.
Note: The tax cost setting amount applicable in relation to
the asset for that purpose is worked out in accordance with Division 705 of
the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997.
Income Tax (Transitional
Provisions) Act 1997
1 Paragraph 707-325(1)(a)
Omit “increase”, substitute “work out”.
2 Subsection 707-325(3)
(heading)
Repeal the heading, substitute:
Adding to the modified market value of the real loss-maker
3 Subsection 707-325(3)
Omit “the modified market value of the real loss-maker at the initial
transfer time were increased by”, substitute “there were added to
the modified market value of the real loss-maker at the initial transfer
time”.
4 At the end of subsection
707-325(3)
Add:
Note: The amount worked out using the formula will be nil if
the value donor’s modified market value at the initial transfer time is
nil. Even if the amount is nil, section 707-327 may treat losses
transferred by the value donor to the transferee as if they were included in the
bundle of losses transferred by the real loss-maker to the
transferee.
5 Subsection 707-325(5)
(heading)
Repeal the heading, substitute:
Choice to work out available fraction using this section
6 Subsection 707-325(5)
Omit “increase”, substitute “work out”.
7 Paragraph 707-327(1)(a)
Repeal the paragraph, substitute:
(a) the available fraction for a bundle of other losses is worked out,
because of section 707-325, as if there were added to the modified market
value of the real loss-maker of the other losses an amount worked out under that
section by reference to the value donor’s modified market value;
and
8 At the end of subsection
707-327(1)
Add:
Note: This section has effect even if the amount added to
the real loss-maker’s modified market value under section 707-325 is
nil because the value donor’s modified market value is
nil.
9 Paragraph 707-327(2)(b)
Repeal the paragraph, substitute:
(b) each other company (if any) for which it is the case that the
available fraction for the bundle is worked out, because of another application
of section 707-325, as if there were added to the real loss-maker’s
modified market value an amount worked out by reference to the
company.
10 Subsection 707-327(6)
(note)
Omit “working out an increased available fraction for a bundle of
losses under section 707-325”, substitute “section 707-325
to apply in relation to the working out of the available fraction for a bundle
of losses”.
Income Tax (Transitional
Provisions) Act 1997
1 Section 707-405 (link
note)
Repeal the link note, substitute:
[The next Division is Division 717.]
2 At the end of
Part 3-90
Add:
(1) This section operates in relation to an income year
if:
(a) a consolidated group came into existence during an income year (the
current year); and
(b) the current year ended before 1 July 2004; and
(c) section 160AFE of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 as
amended by the New Business Tax System (Consolidation, Value Shifting,
Demergers and Other Measures) Act 2002 applies in relation to the head
company of the consolidated group for the current year; and
(d) an entity (the joining entity) became a subsidiary
member of a consolidated group at a time (the joining time) during
the current year; and
(e) the condition in subsection (2) is satisfied.
(2) The condition is that the joining entity and the head company of the
group were members of the same wholly-owned group:
(a) if the joining time was the start of the current year or the time the
joining entity came into existence—at the joining time; or
(b) otherwise—throughout the period:
(i) beginning at the start of the current year, or the time the joining
entity came into existence (whichever is later); and
(ii) ending at the joining time.
(3) For the purposes of section 717-15 of the Income Tax
Assessment Act 1997 in relation to the current year, the reference in
subparagraph 717-15(1)(b)(i) of that Act to the start of that income year is
taken to be a reference to the end of that income year.
(1) This section operates if:
(a) a consolidated group came into existence during an income year (the
current year); and
(b) the current year ended before 1 July 2004; and
(c) section 160AFE of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 as
amended by the New Business Tax System (Consolidation, Value Shifting,
Demergers and Other Measures) Act 2002 applies in relation to the head
company of the consolidated group for the current year; and
(d) an entity (the joining entity) became a subsidiary
member of the consolidated group at a time (the joining time)
during the current year; and
(e) the condition in subsection (2) is satisfied; and
(f) the joining entity had excess foreign tax credits from the earliest
non-membership period (under section 701-30 of the Income Tax Assessment
Act 1997) in the current year.
(2) The condition is that the joining entity and the head company of the
consolidated group were members of the same wholly-owned group:
(a) if the joining time was the start of the current year or the time the
joining entity came into existence—at the joining time; or
(b) otherwise—throughout the period:
(i) beginning at the start of the current year, or the time the joining
entity came into existence (whichever is later); and
(ii) ending at the joining time.
(3) Section 160AFE of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936
operates in relation to the head company of the consolidated group for the
current year as if:
(a) subsection 160AFE(4) of that Act provided that the amount of the
excess foreign tax credits mentioned in paragraph (1)(f) of this section
was the amount of the head company’s excess foreign tax credits from an
earlier year of income (the notional year); and
(b) paragraphs 160AFE(3)(a) and (b) of that Act provided that the excess
foreign tax credits from the notional year should be applied before the other
credits mentioned in those paragraphs.
To avoid doubt, sections 717-15 and 717-20 do not operate so as to
result in an amount of foreign tax (within the meaning of the Income Tax
Assessment Act 1936) being counted twice for the purposes of
section 160AF of that Act.
[The next Division is Division 820.]
Income Tax Assessment Act
1936
1 Section 160AFE
Repeal the section, substitute:
(1) This section operates if the amount (the current foreign tax
amount) worked out under paragraph 160AF(1)(c) for a taxpayer for a year
of income (the current year) falls short of the amount worked out
under paragraph 160AF(1)(d) for the taxpayer for the current year.
(2) The taxpayer’s excess foreign tax credits from earlier years of
income (see subsection (4)) are applied in accordance with
subsection (3) to increase the current foreign tax amount.
(3) Apply those credits according to the following rules:
(a) only apply credits from the most recent 5 years of income ending
before the current year;
(b) apply credits from an earlier year of income before applying credits
for a later year of income;
(c) do not apply credits beyond the extent of the shortfall mentioned in
subsection (1);
(d) do not apply credits to the extent that the credits have already been
applied under a previous operation of this section.
(4) The taxpayer has excess foreign tax credits from an
earlier year of income (the earlier year) if the amount worked out
under paragraph 160AF(1)(c) for the taxpayer for the earlier year exceeds the
amount worked out under paragraph 160AF(1)(d) for the taxpayer for the earlier
year. The amount of the credits equals the excess.
(5) This section operates separately in relation to each class of foreign
income identified in subsection 160AF(7), as if the taxpayer’s foreign
income of that class for a year of income were the whole of the taxpayer’s
foreign income for that year.
2 Basic rule about application of
section 160AFE
(1) Section 160AFE of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 as
amended by this Schedule applies in relation to a taxpayer for each of
its:
(a) income years starting after 30 June 2003; and
(b) non-membership periods (if any) under section 701-30 of the
Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 starting after 30 June
2003.
(2) This item does not apply in relation to a taxpayer to which
item 3 applies.
3 Different application for members of certain
groups
(1) This item applies to a taxpayer if:
(a) the taxpayer becomes a member of a consolidated group or MEC group on
the day (the consolidation day) the group comes into existence;
and
(b) the consolidation day either is before 1 July 2003 or is
both:
(i) the first day of the first income year starting after 30 June
2003 of the group’s head company (for a consolidated group) or provisional
head company (for a MEC group) on the consolidation day; and
(ii) before 1 July 2004; and
(c) the taxpayer was not a member of a consolidated group or MEC group
before the consolidation day.
(2) Section 160AFE of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 as
amended by this Schedule applies in relation to the taxpayer for each of
its:
(a) income years starting on or after the consolidation day; and
(b) non-membership periods (if any) under section 701-30 of the
Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 starting on or after the consolidation
day.
4 Transitional provision for
section 160AFE
For the purposes of paragraph 160AFE(3)(d) of the Income Tax Assessment
Act 1936 as in force immediately after the commencement of this Schedule,
take account of an amount utilised or applied under section 160AFE of that
Act as in force either before or after that commencement for a year of income
ending before or after that commencement.
New Business Tax System
(Consolidation) Act (No. 1) 2002
1 Subitem 39(9) of
Schedule 3
Omit “in the same way as they apply in relation to”, substitute
“as if it were”.
Income Tax Assessment Act
1997
1 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
excess foreign tax credits has the meaning given by
subsection 160AFE(4) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.
Income Tax Assessment Act
1997
1 Paragraph 204-30(3)(b)
Repeal the paragraph, substitute:
(b) that a specified *exempting debit
arises in the *exempting account of the entity,
for a specified *distribution or other benefit
to a disadvantaged member;
(c) that no *imputation benefit is to
arise in respect of a distribution that is made to a favoured member and
specified in the determination.
2 Subsection 204-30(4)
Repeal the subsection, substitute:
(4) The Commissioner may:
(a) specify the *franking debit under
paragraph (3)(a) by specifying the
*franking percentage to be used in working out
the amount of the debit; and
(b) specify the *exempting debit under
paragraph (3)(b) by specifying the
*exempting percentage to be used in working out
the amount of the debit.
3 Subsection 204-30(5)
Omit “or (b)”, substitute “, (b) or (c)”.
4 Paragraph 204-30(6)(d)
Repeal the paragraph, substitute:
(d) an *exempting credit would arise in
the *exempting account of the member as a
result of the distribution; or
(e) the member would not be liable to pay
*withholding tax on the distribution, because
of the operation of paragraph 128B(3)(ga) of the Income Tax Assessment Act
1936.
5 At the end of subsection
204-30(8)
Add:
; (f) the other member is an *exempting
entity.
6 At the end of
section 204-30
Add:
(9) A *member of an entity derives a
greater benefit from franking credits than another member of the
entity if any of the following circumstances exist in relation to the first
member in the income year in which the
*distribution giving rise to the benefit is
made, and not in relation to the other member:
(a) a *franking credit arises for the
first member under item 5, 6 or 7 of the table in section 208-130
(distributions by *exempting entities to
exempting entities);
(b) a franking credit or *exempting
credit arises for the first member because the distribution is
*franked with an exempting credit;
(c) the first member is entitled to a
*tax offset because:
(i) the distribution is a *franked
distribution made by an exempting entity; or
(ii) the distribution is *franked with an
exempting credit.
7 At the end of
section 204-35
Add:
(2) If the Commissioner makes a determination giving rise to an
*exempting debit in the
*exempting account of an entity under paragraph
204-30(3)(b), the debit arises in the exempting account of the entity on the day
on which the notice of determination is given to the entity in accordance with
section 204-50.
8 After section 204-40
Insert:
The amount of the *exempting debit
arising because of a determination by the Commissioner under paragraph
204-30(3)(b) must not exceed:
(a) if the specified *distribution has
been *franked with an exempting
credit—the difference between the amount of the
*exempting credit on the distribution and an
amount worked out by multiplying the amount of the distribution by the highest
*exempting percentage at which a distribution
to a favoured member is franked; or
(b) if the specified distribution, although
*frankable, has not been franked with an
exempting credit—an amount worked out by multiplying the amount of the
distribution by the highest exempting percentage at which a distribution to a
favoured member is franked; or
(c) if the specified distribution is
*unfrankable—an amount worked out by
multiplying the amount of the distribution by the highest exempting percentage
at which a distribution to a favoured member is franked; or
(d) if the specified benefit is the issue of bonus shares from a share
premium account—an amount worked out by multiplying the amount debited to
the share premium account in respect of the bonus shares by the highest
exempting percentage at which a distribution to a favoured member is franked;
or
(e) if some other benefit is specified—an amount worked out by
multiplying the value of the benefit by the highest exempting percentage at
which a distribution to a favoured member is franked.
9 Section 204-45
Omit “paragraph 204-30(3)(b)”, substitute “paragraph
204-30(3)(c)”.
10 Paragraph 204-50(2)(b)
Repeal the paragraph, substitute:
(b) in a case where the Commissioner determines that an
*exempting debit is to arise in the
*exempting account of an entity under paragraph
204-30(3)(b)—to the entity; and
(c) in a case where a favoured member is denied an
*imputation benefit under paragraph
204-30(3)(c)—to the favoured member.
11 Subsection 204-50(3)
Omit “paragraph 204-30(3)(b)”, substitute “paragraph
204-30(3)(c)”.
12 Section 205-25
Omit “specified in the table in section 205-15 or 205-30”,
substitute “specified in a relevant table”.
13 At the end of
section 205-25
Add:
(2) The tables in sections 205-15 and 205-30 are relevant for the
purposes of subsection (1).
14 Section 207-75
Omit “*franked distribution”,
substitute
“*distribution”.
15 After Division 207
Insert:
Table of Subdivisions
Guide to Division 208
208-A What are exempting entities and former exempting entities?
208-B Franking with an exempting credit
208-C Amount of the exempting credit on a distribution
208-D Distribution statements
208-E Distributions to be franked with exempting credits to the same
extent
208-F Exempting accounts and franking accounts of exempting entities and
former exempting entities
208-G Tax effects of distributions by exempting entities
208-H Tax effect of a distribution franked with an exempting
credit
Table of sections
208-5 What is an exempting entity?
208-10 Former exempting entities
208-15 Distributions by exempting entities and former
exempting entities
(1) An exempting entity is a corporate tax entity that is effectively
owned by entities that, either because they are not Australian residents or
because they receive distributions as exempt income, would not be able to fully
utilise franking credits on distributions by the corporate tax entity.
(2) In deciding whether a corporate tax entity is effectively owned by
such entities, these rules:
(a) look at the membership interests in the entity that involve the holder
of the interest in bearing the risks and accruing the opportunities of ownership
of the entity; and
(b) ask whether at least 95% of those membership interests, and 95% of any
interests in those membership interests, are held by Australian residents or
entities that receive distributions as exempt income.
When an entity ceases to be an exempting entity, it becomes a former
exempting entity.
To ensure that franking credits accumulated by an exempting entity are
not the target of franking credit trading, these rules:
(a) limit the circumstances in which a distribution franked with those
credits can give rise to benefits under the imputation system; and
(b) quarantine those credits by moving them into a separate account,
called the exempting account, when the entity ceases to be an exempting entity;
and
(c) deny a recipient of a distribution franked with a credit from that
account any benefit under the imputation system as a result of that
distribution, unless the recipient was a member of the entity immediately before
it became a former exempting entity.
Table of sections
208-20 Exempting entities
208-25 Effective ownership of entity by prescribed
persons
208-30 Accountable membership interests
208-35 Accountable partial interests
208-40 Prescribed persons
208-45 Persons who are taken to be prescribed
persons
208-50 Former exempting companies
A *corporate tax entity is an
exempting entity at a particular time if, at that time, the entity
is effectively owned by prescribed persons.
Note: Prescribed persons are identified in
sections 208-40 and 208-45.
(1) An entity is effectively owned by prescribed persons at
a particular time if:
(a) at that time:
(i) not less than 95% of the *accountable
membership interests in the entity; or
(ii) not less than 95% of the
*accountable partial interests in the
entity;
are held by, or held indirectly for the benefit of, prescribed persons;
or
(b) paragraph (a) does not apply but it would nevertheless be
reasonable to conclude that, at that time, the risks involved in, and the
opportunities resulting from, holding accountable membership interests, or
accountable partial interests, in the entity that are not held by, or directly
or indirectly for the benefit of, prescribed persons are substantially borne by,
or substantially accrue to, prescribed persons.
(2) In deciding whether it would be reasonable to conclude as mentioned in
paragraph (1)(b):
(a) have regard to any *arrangement in
respect of *membership interests (including
unissued membership interests), or in respect of
*partial interests, in the entity (including
any derivatives held or issued in connection with those membership interests or
partial interests) of which the entity is aware; but
(b) do not have regard to risks involved in the ownership of membership
interests, or partial interests, in the entity that are substantially borne by
any person in the person’s capacity as a secured creditor.
(3) An entity has a partial interest in a
*corporate tax entity if it has an interest in
a *membership interest in the corporate tax
entity.
(1) The purpose of this section is to identify which
*membership interests in an entity are relevant
in determining whether the entity is effectively owned by prescribed
persons.
(2) A *membership interest in an entity
is an accountable membership interest if it is not an excluded
membership interest.
(3) A *membership interest in an entity
is an excluded membership interest if, having regard to:
(a) the purposes for which the membership interest was issued;
and
(b) any special or limited rights connected with, arising from, or
attached to:
(i) the membership interest; or
(ii) other membership interests in the entity held by the holder of the
membership interest; or
(iii) membership interests in the entity held by persons other than the
holder of the membership interest; or
(iv) interests in any of the above;
including rights that are conferred or exercisable only if the holder of
the membership interest or interests concerned is, or is not, a prescribed
person; and
(c) the extent to which any such special or limited rights are similar to
or differ from the rights that are normally attached to the ownership of
*ordinary membership interests in
*corporate tax entities; and
(d) the relationship between the value of the membership interest and the
value of the entity; and
(e) any relationship or connection (whether of a personal or business
nature) between holders of membership interests in the entity of which the
entity is aware; and
(f) any *arrangement in respect of
membership interests (including unissued membership interests) in the entity, or
interests in membership interests in the entity, of which the entity is
aware;
it would be reasonable to conclude that the membership interest is not
relevant in determining whether the entity is effectively owned by prescribed
persons because holding the membership interest does not involve the holder
bearing the risks, or result in the accrual to the holder of the opportunities,
of ownership of the entity that ordinarily arise from, or are ordinarily
attached to, the holding of ordinary membership interests in an
entity.
(4) In applying subsection (3), the fact that a person is a trustee
is to be disregarded.
(5) Without limiting subsection (3), a
*membership interest in an entity held by a
person who is not a prescribed person is an excluded membership
interest if:
(a) it is a finance membership interest; or
(b) it is a distribution access membership interest; or
(c) it does not carry the right to receive distributions; or
(d) it was issued, transferred or acquired for a purpose (other than an
incidental purpose) of ensuring that the entity is not effectively owned by
prescribed persons.
(6) A *membership interest is a
finance membership interest if:
(a) the membership interest is a
*non-equity share in the entity; or
(b) having regard to the rights attached to the membership interest and to
any *arrangement with respect to the membership
interest of which the entity is aware, the membership interest is equivalent to
a debt owed by the entity to the holder of the membership interest.
(7) A *membership interest to which
subsection (6) does not apply is a finance membership
interest if:
(a) the manner in which the
*distributions payable in respect of the
membership interest are calculated, and the conditions applying to the payment
of such distributions, indicate that the distributions paid are equivalent to
the receipt by the person to whom they are paid of interest or an amount in the
nature of or similar to interest; or
(b) the capital invested by the holder of the membership interest will be
redeemed or, because of an *arrangement between
the holder and the entity or an *associate of
the entity, it is reasonable for the holder to expect that the capital will be
redeemed, for an amount that is not less than, or for property (including other
membership interests in the entity) the value of which is not less than, the
amount paid for the membership interest; or
(c) the membership interest is redeemable by the entity by payment of a
lump sum or by the transfer of property, or the membership interest has a
preferred right to a repayment of capital on a winding up, where the amount of
the lump sum or the value of the property, or the amount of the capital to be
repaid, as the case may be, is to be calculated by reference to an implicit
interest rate.
(8) A *membership interest in an entity
is a distribution access membership interest if, having regard
to:
(a) the terms of the issue of the membership interest, including any
guarantee of payment of distributions; and
(b) the amounts of the *distributions
paid on the membership interest relative to the issue price of the membership
interest; and
(c) whether there is any guaranteed rate at which
*franked distributions are to be paid on the
membership interest; and
(d) the duration of the period within which the membership interest was
issued; and
(e) the rights attached to other membership interests in the entity;
and
(f) any other relevant matters;
it could be concluded that the membership interest was issued only for the
purpose of paying distributions to the holder of the membership
interest.
(1) The purpose of this section is to identify which
*partial interests in an entity are relevant in
determining whether the entity is effectively owned by prescribed
persons.
(2) A *partial interest in an entity is
an accountable partial interest if it is not an excluded partial
interest.
(3) A *partial interest in an entity is
an excluded partial interest if, having regard to:
(a) the purposes for which the interest was granted; and
(b) the nature of the interest; and
(c) any special or limited rights connected with or arising
from:
(i) the interest; or
(ii) other *membership interests, or
partial interests, in the entity held by the holder of the interest;
or
(iii) membership interests, or partial interests, in the entity held by
persons other than the holder of the interest;
including rights that are conferred or exercisable only if the holder of
the membership interests or partial interests concerned is, or is not, a
prescribed person; and
(d) the extent to which the interest is similar to or differs from
beneficial ownership; and
(e) the relationship between the value of the interest and the value of
the entity; and
(f) any relationship or connection (whether of a personal or business
nature) between holders of partial interests in the entity, and the holders of
membership interests in the entity, of which the entity is aware; and
(g) any *arrangement in respect of
membership interests (including unissued membership interests) in the entity, or
partial interests in the entity, of which the entity is aware;
it would be reasonable to conclude that the partial interest is not
relevant in determining whether the entity is effectively owned by prescribed
persons because holding the membership interest to which the partial interest
relates does not involve the holder bearing the risks, or result in the accrual
to the holder of the opportunities, of ownership of the entity that ordinarily
arise from, or are ordinarily attached to, the holding of
*ordinary membership interests in an
entity.
(4) In applying subsection (3), the fact that a person is a trustee
is to be disregarded.
(5) Without limiting subsection (3), a
*partial interest in an entity is also an
excluded partial interest if it was granted or otherwise created,
or was transferred or acquired, for a purpose (other than an incidental purpose)
of ensuring that the entity is not effectively owned by prescribed
persons.
(1) A company is a prescribed person in relation to another
*corporate tax entity if:
(a) the company is not an *Australian
resident; or
(b) were the company to receive a
*distribution made by the other corporate tax
entity, the distribution would be *exempt
income of the company.
(2) A trustee is a prescribed person in relation to a
*corporate tax entity if:
(a) all the beneficiaries in the trust are prescribed persons under other
provisions of this section; or
(b) were the trustee to receive a
*distribution made by the corporate tax entity,
the distribution would be *exempt income of the
trust estate.
(3) A *partnership is a prescribed
person in relation to a *corporate tax
entity if:
(a) all the partners are prescribed persons under other provisions of this
section; or
(b) were the partnership to receive a
*distribution made by the corporate tax entity,
the distribution would be *exempt income of the
partnership.
(4) An individual (other than a trustee) is a prescribed person in
relation to a *corporate tax entity
if:
(a) he or she is not an *Australian
resident; or
(b) were he or she to receive a
*distribution made by the corporate tax entity,
the distribution would be *exempt income of the
individual.
(5) The Commonwealth, each of the States, the Australian Capital
Territory, the Northern Territory and Norfolk Island are prescribed persons in
relation to any *corporate tax
entity.
(1) This section applies to a person that:
(a) is a *company, a trustee, or a
*partnership, that holds
*membership interests (whether
*accountable membership interests or excluded
membership interests), or *partial interests
(whether *accountable partial interests or
excluded partial interests), in a *corporate
tax entity (the relevant entity); and
(b) is not a prescribed person under section 208-40.
(2) A *company that holds
*membership interests, or
*partial interests, in the relevant entity is
taken to be a prescribed person in relation to the relevant entity
if the risks involved in, and the opportunities resulting from, holding the
membership interests or partial interests are substantially borne by, or
substantially accrue to, as the case may be, one or more prescribed
persons.
(3) A trustee of a trust who holds
*membership interests, or
*partial interests, in the relevant entity is
taken to be a prescribed person in relation to the relevant entity
if the risks involved in, and the opportunities resulting from, holding the
membership interests or partial interests are substantially borne by, or
substantially accrue to, as the case may be, one or more prescribed
persons.
(4) A trustee of a trust who holds
*membership interests, or
*partial interests, in the relevant entity is
taken to be a prescribed person in relation to the relevant entity
if:
(a) unless subsection (7) applies, the trust is controlled by one or
more persons who are prescribed persons; or
(b) all the beneficiaries who are presently entitled to, or during the
relevant year of income become presently entitled to, income from the trust are
prescribed persons.
(5) In determining whether subsection (3) or (4) applies in respect
of a trust that is controlled by a person, have regard to the way in which the
person, or any *associate of the person,
exercises powers in relation to the trust.
(6) A person controls a trust if:
(a) the person has the power, either directly, or indirectly through one
or more interposed entities, to control the application of the income, or the
distribution of the property, of the trust; or
(b) the person has the power, either directly, or indirectly through one
or more entities, to appoint or remove the trustee of the trust; or
(c) the person has the power, either directly, or indirectly through one
or more entities, to appoint or remove beneficiaries of the trust; or
(d) the trustee of the trust is accustomed or under an obligation, whether
formal or informal, to act according to the directions, instructions or wishes
of the person or of an *associate of the
person.
(7) Paragraph (4)(a) does not apply in relation to a trust if some of
the beneficiaries receiving income from the trust are not prescribed persons and
the Commissioner considers that it is reasonable to conclude that the risks
involved in, and the opportunities resulting from, holding the
*membership interests or
*partial interests in the relevant entity are
substantially borne by, or substantially accrue to, as the case may be, one or
more persons who are not prescribed persons.
(8) A *partnership that holds
*membership interests, or
*partial interests, in the relevant entity is
taken to be a prescribed person in relation to the relevant entity
if the risks involved in, and the opportunities resulting from, holding the
membership interests or partial interests are substantially borne by, or
substantially accrue to, as the case may be, one or more prescribed
persons.
(9) If any of the prescribed persons referred to in subsection (2),
(3), (4) or (8) is a *corporate tax entity,
that subsection applies even if the risks involved in, and the opportunities
resulting from, holding any of the *membership
interests, or *partial interests, in that
entity are substantially borne by, or substantially accrue to, as the case may
be, one or more persons who are not prescribed persons.
(1) Subject to subsection (2), a
*corporate tax entity is a former
exempting entity if it has, at any time, ceased to be an
*exempting entity and is not again an exempting
entity.
(2) If an entity that, at any time, becomes effectively owned by
prescribed persons ceases to be so effectively owned within 12 months after that
time, the entity is not taken, by so ceasing, to become a former exempting
entity.
If a former exempting entity makes a distribution in circumstances where it
could be franked, the entity can frank the distribution with an exempting
credit.
Table of sections
Operative provisions
208-60 Franking with an exempting credit
[This is the end of the Guide.]
An entity franks a
*distribution with an exempting credit
if:
(a) the entity is a *former exempting
entity when the distribution is made; and
(b) the entity is a *franking entity that
satisfies the *residency requirement when the
distribution is made; and
(c) the distribution is a
*frankable distribution; and
(d) the entity allocates an *exempting
credit to the distribution.
Note: The residency requirement for an entity making a
distribution is set out in section 202-20.
The amount of the exempting credit on a distribution is that stated in the
distribution statement, unless the amount stated exceeds the maximum franking
credit for the distribution. In that case, it is nil.
Table of sections
Operative provisions
208-70 Amount of the exempting credit on a
distribution
[This is the end of the Guide.]
(1) Subject to subsection (2), the amount of the
*exempting credit on a
*distribution is that stated in the
*distribution statement for the
distribution.
(2) If the sum of the *franking credit
and the *exempting credit stated in the
*distribution statement for a
*distribution exceeds the
*maximum franking credit for the distribution,
the amount of the exempting credit on the distribution is taken to be
nil.
Note: If the franking credit stated in
the distribution statement exceeds the maximum franking credit for the
distribution, the amount of the franking credit on the distribution is taken to
equal that maximum under section 202-65.
Former exempting entities and exempting entities that make certain
distributions must provide additional information in the distribution statement
given to the recipient.
Table of sections
Operative provisions
208-80 Additional information to be included by a former
exempting entity or exempting entity
[This is the end of the Guide.]
(1) A *former exempting entity that makes
a *distribution
*franked with an exempting credit must include
in the *distribution statement given to the
recipient, a statement that there is an
*exempting credit of a specified amount on the
distribution.
(2) An *exempting entity that makes a
*frankable distribution to a
*member must include in the
*distribution statement given to the member, a
statement to the effect that members who are
*Australian residents are not entitled to a
*tax offset or
*franking credit as a result of the
distribution, except for certain *corporate tax
entities, and employees who receive the distribution in connection with certain
*employee share schemes.
(3) If, under subsection (1) or (2), a statement must be included in
a *distribution statement, the distribution
statement is taken not to have been given unless the statement is
included.
All frankable distributions made within a franking period must be franked
to the same extent with an exempting credit.
Table of sections
Operative provisions
208-90 All frankable distributions made within a franking
period must be franked to the same extent with an exempting
credit
208-95 Exempting percentage
208-100 Consequences of breaching the rule in
section 208-90
[This is the end of the Guide.]
(1) If an entity *franks a
*distribution with an exempting credit, it must
frank each other *frankable distribution made
within the same *franking period with an
exempting credit worked out at the same
*exempting percentage.
(2) If an entity is not a *former
exempting entity for the whole of a *franking
period (the longer period), then, for the purposes of
subsection (1), each period within that longer period during which the
entity is a former exempting entity is taken to be a franking
period.
The exempting percentage for a
*frankable distribution is worked out using the
formula:
If an entity *franks a
*distribution with an exempting credit in
breach of section 208-90:
(a) that distribution is taken not to have been franked with an exempting
credit; and
(b) each other *frankable distribution
made by the entity within the relevant
*franking period is taken not to have been
franked with an exempting credit.
This Subdivision:
• creates an exempting account for each former exempting entity;
and
• identifies when exempting credits and debits arise in those
accounts and the amount of those credits and debits; and
• identifies when there is an exempting surplus or deficit in the
account; and
• identifies when franking credits and debits arise in the franking
account of an entity because it is an exempting entity, or former exempting
entity.
Table of sections
Operative provisions
208-110 Exempting account
208-115 Exempting credits
208-120 Exempting debits
208-125 Exempting surplus and deficit
208-130 Franking credits arising because of status as
exempting entity or former exempting entity
208-135 Relationships that will give rise to a franking
credit under item 5 of the table in section 208-130
208-140 Membership of the same effectively wholly-owned
group
208-145 Franking debits arising because of status as
exempting entity or former exempting entity
208-150 Residency requirement
208-155 Eligible continuing substantial
member
208-160 Distributions that are affected by a manipulation of
the imputation system
208-165 Amount of the exempting credit or franking credit
arising because of a distribution franked with an exempting
credit
208-170 Where a determination under paragraph 177EA(5)(b) of
the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 affects part of the
distribution
208-175 When does a distribution franked with an exempting
credit flow indirectly to an entity?
208-180 What is an entity’s share of the exempting
credit on a distribution?
208-185 Minister may convert exempting surplus to franking
credit of former exempting entity previously owned by the
Commonwealth
[This is the end of the Guide.]
Each *former exempting entity has an
exempting account.
The following table sets out when a credit arises in the
*exempting account of a
*former exempting entity. A credit in the
former exempting entity’s account is called an exempting
credit.
|
Exempting Credits |
|||
|---|---|---|---|
|
Item |
If: |
A credit of: |
Arises: |
|
1 |
the entity had a *franking surplus at the
time it became a *former exempting entity (at
the time of its transition) |
an amount equal to: |
immediately after its transition |
|
2 |
the entity receives a *distribution
*franked with an exempting credit;
and the entity satisfies the *residency
requirement for the income year in which the distribution is made and at the
time the distribution is made; and the distribution is not wholly *exempt
income of the entity; and the entity is an *eligible continuing
substantial member in relation to the distribution; and the distribution is not affected by a manipulation of the imputation system
mentioned in section 208-160 |
an amount worked out under section 208-165 |
on the day on which the distribution is made |
|
3 |
the entity receives a *distribution
*franked with an exempting credit;
and the entity satisfies the *residency
requirement for the income year in which the distribution is made and at the
time the distribution is made; and the distribution is not wholly *exempt
income of the entity; and the entity is an *eligible continuing
substantial member in relation to the distribution; and the Commissioner has made a determination under paragraph 177EA(5)(b) of
the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 that no franking credit benefit
(within the meaning of that section) is to arise in respect of a specified part
of the distribution |
an amount worked out under section 208-170 |
on the day on which the distribution is made |
|
4 |
a *distribution
*franked with an exempting credit
*flows indirectly to the entity (the
ultimate recipient); and the recipient of the distribution is an
*eligible continuing substantial member in
relation to the distribution; and except for the fact that the ultimate recipient is not an eligible
continuing substantial member in relation to the distribution, it would have
been entitled to an *exempting credit because
of the distribution had the distribution been made to the ultimate
recipient |
an amount equal to the exempting credit that would have arisen for the
ultimate recipient if: |
on the day on which the distribution is made |
|
5 |
the entity *pays a
*PAYG instalment; and the entity satisfies the *residency
requirement for the income year in relation to which the PAYG instalment is
paid; and the entity was an *exempting entity for
the whole or part of the relevant *PAYG
instalment period |
an amount equal to that part of the payment that is attributable to the
period during which the entity was an exempting entity |
on the day on which the payment is made |
|
6 |
the entity *pays income tax; and the entity satisfies the *residency
requirement for the income year for which the tax is paid; and the entity was an *exempting entity for
the whole or part of that income year |
an amount equal to that part of the payment that is attributable to the
period during which the entity was an exempting entity |
on the day on which the payment is made |
|
7 |
the *exempting account of the entity
would, apart from this item, be in *deficit
immediately before the end of an income year |
an amount equal to the deficit |
immediately before the end of the income year |
|
8 |
the entity becomes an *exempting entity;
and the entity has an *exempting deficit at
the time it becomes an exempting entity |
an amount equal to the exempting deficit |
immediately after the entity becomes an exempting entity |
The following table sets out when a debit arises in the
*exempting account of the
*former exempting entity. A debit in the
*former exempting entity's exempting account is
called an exempting debit.
|
Exempting debits |
|||
|---|---|---|---|
|
Item |
If: |
A debit of: |
Arises: |
|
1 |
the entity had a *franking deficit at the
time it became a *former exempting entity (at
the time of its transition) |
an amount equal to: |
immediately after its transition |
|
2 |
the entity makes a *distribution
*franked with an exempting credit |
an amount equal to the *exempting credit
on the distribution |
on the day on which the distribution is made |
|
3 |
the entity *receives a refund of income
tax; and the entity was an *exempting entity during
all or part of the income year to which the refund relates; and the entity satisfies the *residency
requirement for the income year to which the refund relates |
an amount equal to that part of the refund that is attributable to the
period during which the entity is an exempting entity |
on the day on which the refund is received |
|
4 |
the Commissioner makes a determination under paragraph 204-30(3)(b) giving
rise to an *exempting debit for the entity
(streaming distributions) |
the amount specified in the determination |
on the day specified in section 204-35 |
|
5 |
a *franking debit arises for the entity
under section 204-15 (linked distributions), 204-25 (substituting
tax-exempt bonus shares for franked distributions) or a determination made under
paragraph 204-30(3)(a) (streaming distributions); and the entity was an *exempting entity for
the whole or part of the period to which the franking debit relates |
an amount equal to that part of the franking debit that relates to the
period during which the entity was an exempting entity |
when the franking debit arises |
|
6 |
the Minister makes a determination under paragraph 208-185(4)(a) giving
rise to an *exempting debit for the
entity |
the amount specified in the determination |
on the day specified in the determination |
|
7 |
the entity becomes an *exempting entity;
and the entity has an *exempting surplus at
the time it becomes an exempting entity |
an amount equal to the exempting surplus |
immediately after the entity becomes an exempting entity |
(1) An entity’s *exempting account
is in surplus at a particular time if, at that time, the sum of
the *exempting credits in the account exceeds
the sum of the *exempting debits in the
account. The amount of the exempting surplus is the amount of the
excess.
(2) An entity’s *exempting account
is in deficit at a particular time if, at that time, the sum of
the *exempting debits in the account exceeds
the sum of the *exempting credits in the
account. The amount of the exempting deficit is the amount of the
excess.
The following table sets out when a credit arises in the
*franking account of an entity because of its
status as an *exempting entity or
*former exempting entity.
|
Franking credits arising because of status as an exempting entity or
former exempting entity |
|||
|---|---|---|---|
|
Item |
If: |
A credit of: |
Arises: |
|
1 |
an entity becomes a *former exempting
entity; and the entity has a *franking deficit at the
time it becomes a former exempting entity |
an amount equal to the franking deficit |
immediately after the entity becomes a former exempting entity |
|
2 |
an entity receives a *distribution
*franked with an exempting credit;
and the entity is an *exempting entity at the
time the distribution is made; and the entity satisfies the *residency
requirement for the income year in which the distribution is made and at the
time the distribution is made; and the distribution is not wholly *exempt
income of the entity; and the entity is an *eligible continuing
substantial member in relation to the distribution; and the distribution is not affected by a manipulation of the imputation system
mentioned in section 208-160 |
an amount worked out under section 208-165 |
on the day on which the distribution is made |
|
3 |
the entity receives a *distribution
*franked with an exempting credit;
and the entity is an *exempting entity at the
time the distribution is made; and the entity satisfies the *residency
requirement for the income year in which the distribution is made and at the
time the distribution is made; and the distribution is not wholly *exempt
income of the entity; and the entity is an *eligible continuing
substantial member in relation to the distribution; and the Commissioner has made a determination under paragraph 177EA(5)(b) of
the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 that no franking credit benefit
(within the meaning of that section) is to arise in respect of a specified part
of the distribution |
an amount worked out under section 208-170 |
on the day on which the distribution is made |
|
4 |
a *distribution
*franked with an exempting credit
*flows indirectly to the entity (the
ultimate recipient); and the recipient of the distribution is an
*eligible continuing substantial member in
relation to the distribution; and except for the fact that the ultimate recipient is not an eligible
continuing substantial member in relation to the distribution, it would have
been entitled to a *franking credit because of
the distribution had the distribution been made to the ultimate
recipient |
an amount equal to the franking credit that would have arisen for the
ultimate recipient if: |
on the day on which the distribution is made |
|
5 |
an *exempting entity makes a
*franked distribution to the entity (the
recipient); and at the time the distribution is made: the recipient satisfies the residency requirement for the income year in
which the distribution is made; and the distribution is not wholly *exempt
income of the recipient; and the distribution is not affected by a manipulation of the imputation system
mentioned in section 208-160 |
an amount worked out using the formula in section 208-165 |
on the day on which the distribution is made |
|
6 |
an *exempting entity makes a
*franked distribution to the entity (the
recipient); and at the time the distribution is made: the recipient satisfies the residency requirement for the income year in
which the distribution is made; and the distribution is not wholly *exempt
income of the recipient; and the Commissioner has made a determination under paragraph 177EA(5)(b) of
the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 that no franking credit benefit
(within the meaning of that section) is to arise in respect of a specified part
of the distribution |
an amount worked out using the formula in section 208-170 |
on the day on which the distribution is made |
|
7 |
a *distribution made by an
*exempting entity
*flows indirectly to the entity (the
ultimate recipient); and the recipient of the distribution is an
*eligible continuing substantial member in
relation to the distribution; and except for the fact that the ultimate recipient is not an eligible
continuing substantial member in relation to the distribution, it would have
been entitled to a *franking credit because of
the distribution had the distribution been made to the ultimate
recipient |
an amount equal to the franking credit that would have arisen for the
ultimate recipient if: |
on the day on which the distribution is made |
|
8 |
the Minister makes a determination under paragraph 208-185(4)(b) giving
rise to a *franking credit for the
entity |
the amount of the credit specified in the determination |
on the day specified in the determination |
|
9 |
an *exempting debit arises for the entity
under item 3 or 5 of the table in section 208-120 |
an amount equal to the exempting debit |
when the exempting debit arises |
|
10 |
a *former exempting entity becomes an
*exempting entity; and the entity has an *exempting surplus at
the time it becomes an *exempting
entity |
an amount equal to the *exempting
surplus |
immediately after it becomes an exempting entity |
Note: Item 9 is designed to reverse out franking debits
that arise in relation to a period during which the entity is an exempting
entity. The entity will receive an exempting debit instead.
(1) A relationship between an entity making a
*franked distribution and the recipient of the
distribution is of a type that gives rise to a
*franking credit under item 5 or 6 of the
table in section 208-130 if either:
(a) both entities are members of the same effectively wholly-owned group;
or
(b) the recipient holds more than 5% of the
*membership interests in the entity making the
distribution (other than finance membership interests or distribution access
membership interests within the meaning of section 208-30 or membership
interests that do not carry the right to receive distributions) and it would be
reasonable to conclude that the risks involved in, and the opportunities
resulting from, holding those membership interests are substantially borne by,
or substantially accrue to, the recipient.
(2) In deciding whether it would be reasonable to make the conclusion
mentioned in paragraph (1)(b):
(a) have regard to any *arrangement in
respect of the *membership interests (including
unissued membership interests) in the entity making the distribution (including
derivatives held or issued in connection with those membership interests);
and
(b) do not have regard to risks involved in the ownership of membership
interests in the entity making the distribution that are substantially borne by
any person in the person’s capacity as a secured creditor.
(1) Two *corporate tax entities are
members of the same effectively wholly-owned group of entities on
a particular day if:
(a) throughout that day, not less than 95% of the
*accountable membership interests in each of
the entities, and not less than 95% of the
*accountable partial interests in each of the
entities, are held by, or are held indirectly for the benefit of, the same
persons; or
(b) paragraph (a) does not apply but it would nevertheless be
reasonable to conclude, having regard to the matters mentioned in
subsection (2), that, throughout that day, the risks involved in, and the
opportunities resulting from, holding accountable membership interests, or
accountable partial interests, in each of the entities are substantially borne
by, or substantially accrue to, the same persons.
(2) The matters to which regard is to be had as mentioned in
paragraph (1)(b) are:
(a) any special or limited rights attaching to
*accountable membership interests, or
*accountable partial interests, in each of the
entities held by persons other than the persons mentioned in
paragraph (1)(b) or their *associates;
and
(b) any special rights attaching only to accountable membership interests,
or accountable partial interests, in each of the entities held by the persons
mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) or their associates; and
(c) the respective proportions:
(i) that accountable membership interests in each of the entities held by
the persons mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) or their associates, and other
accountable membership interests in the entity concerned, bear to all the
accountable membership interests in that entity; and
(ii) that accountable partial interests in each of the entities held by
the persons mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) or their associates, and other
accountable partial interests in the entity concerned, bear to all the
accountable partial interests in that entity; and
(d) the respective proportions that:
(i) the total value of accountable membership interests in each of the
entities held by the persons mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) or their
associates, and the total value of other accountable membership interests in the
entity concerned, bear to the total value of all the accountable membership
interests in that entity; and
(ii) the total value of accountable partial interests in each of the
entities held by the persons mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) or their
associates, and the total value of other accountable partial interests in the
entity concerned, bear to the total value of all the accountable partial
interests in that entity; and
(e) the purposes for which accountable membership interests, or
accountable partial interests, in each of the entities were issued or granted to
persons other than the persons mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) or their
associates; and
(f) any *arrangement in respect of
accountable membership interests, or accountable partial interests, in each of
the entities held by persons other than the persons mentioned in
paragraph (1)(b) or their associates (including any derivatives held or
issued in connection with those membership interests or interests) of which the
entity concerned is aware.
The following table sets out when a debit arises in the
*franking account of an entity because of its
status as an *exempting entity or
*former exempting entity.
|
Franking debits arising because of status as an exempting entity or
former exempting entity |
|||
|---|---|---|---|
|
Item |
If: |
A debit of: |
Arises: |
|
1 |
an entity becomes a *former exempting
entity; and the entity has a *franking surplus at the
time it becomes a former exempting entity |
the amount of the franking surplus |
immediately after the entity becomes a former exempting entity |
|
2 |
the *exempting account of a
*former exempting entity would, apart from this
item, be in *deficit immediately before the end
of an income year |
an amount equal to the deficit |
immediately before the end of the income year |
|
3 |
an *exempting credit arises in the
*exempting account of the entity under
item 5 or 6 of the table in section 208-115 |
an amount equal to the exempting credit |
when the exempting credit arises |
|
4 |
a *former exempting entity becomes an
*exempting entity; and the entity has an *exempting deficit at
the time it becomes an *exempting
entity |
an amount equal to the exempting deficit |
immediately after it becomes an exempting entity |
|
5 |
a *franking credit arises in the
*franking account of an entity under
item 3 or 4 of the table in section 205-15 because a
*distribution is made by an
*exempting entity to the entity, or a
distribution made by an exempting entity *flows
indirectly to the entity |
an amount equal to the amount of the franking credit |
when the franking credit arises |
Note 1: Item 3 of the table is designed to reverse out
franking credits that arise in relation to a period during which the entity is
an exempting entity. The entity will receive an exempting credit
instead.
Note 2: Item 5 of the table is designed to reverse out
franking credits that arise under the core rules because an entity receives a
franked distribution from an exempting entity. Only a recipient who is itself an
exempting entity is entitled to a franking credit in these
circumstances.
The tables in sections 208-115, 208-120, 208-130 and 208-145 are
relevant for the purposes of subsection 205-25(1).
Note 1: Subsection 205-25(1) sets out
the residency requirement for an income year in which, or in relation to which,
an event specified in one of the tables occurs.
Note 2: Section 207-75 sets out
the residency requirement that must be satisfied by the entity receiving a
distribution when the distribution is made.
(1) A *member of a
*former exempting entity is an eligible
continuing substantial member in relation to a
*distribution made by the entity if the
following provisions apply.
(2) At both the time when the
*distribution was made, and the time
immediately before the entity ceased to be an
*exempting entity, the
*member was entitled to not less than 5%
of:
(a) where the entity is a
*company:
(i) if the voting shares (as defined in the Corporations Act 2001)
in the relevant former exempting entity are not divided into classes—those
voting shares; or
(ii) if the voting shares (as so defined) in the relevant former exempting
entity are divided into 2 or more classes—the shares in one of those
classes; and
(b) where the entity is a *corporate unit
trust or *public trading trust—the units
in the trust; and
(c) where the entity is a *corporate
limited partnership—the income of the partnership.
(3) At both the time when the
*distribution was made, and the time
immediately before the entity ceased to be an
*exempting entity, the
*member was a person referred to in one or more
of the following paragraphs:
(a) a person who is not an *Australian
resident;
(b) a *life insurance company;
(c) an exempting entity;
(d) a *former exempting entity;
(e) a trustee of a trust in which an interest was held by a person
referred to in any of paragraphs (a) to (d);
(f) a *partnership in which an interest
was held by a person referred to in any of paragraphs (a) to (d).
(4) If the assumptions set out in subsection (5) are made:
(a) if the *member was a person referred
to in any of paragraphs (3)(a) to (d)—the member; or
(b) if the member was a trustee of a trust or a
*partnership, being a trust or partnership in
which a person referred to in any of those paragraphs held an interest—the
holder of the interest;
would (if not an *Australian resident) be
exempt from *withholding tax on the
distribution or (if an Australian resident) be entitled to a
*franking credit or a
*tax offset in respect of the
distribution.
(5) The assumptions referred to in subsection (4) are that:
(a) the relevant former exempting entity was an
*exempting entity at the time it made the
*distribution; and
(b) the distribution was a *franked
distribution made to the member; and
(c) if the *member was a
*former exempting entity—the member was
an exempting entity; and
(d) if the member was a trustee of a trust or
*partnership in which a former exempting entity
had an interest—the former exempting entity was an exempting
entity.
(6) A person is taken to hold an interest in a trust, for the purposes of
paragraph (3)(e), if:
(a) the person is a beneficiary under the trust; or
(b) the person derives, or will derive, income indirectly, through
interposed trusts or *partnerships, from
*distributions received by the
trustee.
(7) A person is taken to hold an interest in a
*partnership, for the purposes of
paragraph (3)(f), if:
(a) the person is a partner in the partnership; or
(b) the person derives, or will derive, income indirectly, through
interposed trusts or partnerships, from
*distributions received by the
partnership.
For the purposes of item 2 of the table in section 208-115 and
items 2 and 5 of the table in section 208-130, a
*distribution to an entity is affected by a
manipulation of the imputation system if:
(a) the Commissioner has made a determination under paragraph 204-30(3)(c)
that no *imputation benefit is to arise for the
entity in respect of the distribution; or
(b) the Commissioner has made a determination under paragraph 177EA(5)(b)
of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 that no franking credit benefit
(within the meaning of that section) is to arise in respect of the distribution
to the entity; or
(c) the distribution is part of a
*dividend stripping operation.
Use the following formula to work out:
(a) the amount of an *exempting credit
arising under item 2 of the table in section 208-115 because a
*former exempting entity receives a
*distribution
*franked with an exempting credit; or
(b) the amount of a *franking credit
arising under item 2 or 5 of the table in section 208-130 because an
*exempting entity receives a distribution
franked with an exempting credit;
Use the following formula to work out:
(a) the amount of an *exempting credit
arising under item 3 of the table in section 208-115 because a
*former exempting entity receives a
*distribution
*franked with an exempting credit; or
(b) the amount of a *franking credit
arising under item 3 or 6 of the table in section 208-130 because an
*exempting entity receives a distribution
franked with an exempting credit;
A *distribution
*franked with an exempting credit is taken to
flow indirectly to an entity if, had it been a
*franked distribution, it would have been taken
to have flowed indirectly to the entity under section 207-35.
To work out an entity’s share of the
*exempting credit on a
*distribution
*franked with that credit, use
section 207-55 to work out what the entity’s share of the credit
would be it if were a *franking credit on a
*franked distribution. The entity’s share
of the exempting credit is equal to that amount.
(1) The Minister may make a determination or determinations under this
section if:
(a) at a particular time, a
*corporate tax entity is an
*exempting entity; and
(b) at that time all of the *membership
interests in the entity are owned by the Commonwealth; and
(c) the Commonwealth has offered for sale or sold, or proposes to offer
for sale, some or all of the membership interests; and
(d) the Minister is satisfied, having regard to the matters mentioned in
subsection (2), that it is desirable to make a determination or
determinations under this section in relation to the entity.
(2) The matters to which the Minister must have regard under
paragraph (1)(d) are:
(a) whether the making of the determination or determinations is necessary
to enable the entity to make *distributions
*franked at a
*franking percentage of 100% after the sale;
and
(b) the extent to which the success of the sale or proposed sale depended
or will depend upon the ability of the entity to make
*franked distributions; and
(c) the extent to which the reduction in receipts of income tax resulting
from the making of the determination or determinations would be offset by the
receipt of increased proceeds from the sale; and
(d) any other matters that the Minister thinks relevant.
(3) The following provisions of this section apply after the
*exempting entity becomes a
*former exempting entity.
(4) If the *former exempting entity
would, apart from this section, have an
*exempting surplus at the end of an income
year, the Minister may, in writing, determine that:
(a) an *exempting debit of the entity
(not exceeding the exempting surplus) specified in the determination is taken to
have arisen immediately before the end of that income year; and
(b) a *franking credit of the entity
equal to the amount of the exempting debit is taken to have arisen immediately
before the end of that income year.
(5) A determination under this section may be expressed to be subject to
compliance by the *former exempting entity with
such conditions as are specified in the determination.
(6) If a condition specified in a determination is not complied with, the
Minister may revoke the determination and, if the Minister thinks it
appropriate, make a further determination under subsection (4).
(7) A determination, unless it is revoked, has effect according to its
terms.
Generally, a franked distribution from an exempting entity will only
generate a tax effect for the recipient under Division 207 if the recipient
is also an exempting entity.
A concession is made to employees of the entity who receive a franked
distribution because they hold shares under an eligible employee share
scheme.
Table of sections
Operative provisions
208-195 Division 207 does not generally
apply
208-200 Distributions to exempting entities
208-205 Distributions to employees acquiring shares under an
eligible employee share scheme
208-210 Subsidiaries
208-215 Eligible employee share scheme
[This is the end of the Guide.]
Division 207 does not apply to a
*distribution by an
*exempting entity, unless expressly applied
under this Subdivision.
(1) Division 207 applies to a
*franked distribution made by an
*exempting entity to another exempting entity
if the distribution gives rise to a *franking
credit for the other exempting entity under item 5 or 6 of the table in
section 208-130.
(2) Division 207 applies to a
*franked distribution that is made by an
*exempting entity and
*flows indirectly to another exempting entity
if the distribution gives rise to a *franking
credit for that other entity under item 7 of the table in
section 208-130.
Division 207 also applies to a
*franked distribution made by an
*exempting entity if:
(a) the distribution is made to a person who is an employee of the
exempting entity, or of a *company that is a
*subsidiary of the exempting entity, at the
time the distribution is made; and
(b) the recipient acquired the *share on
which the distribution is made under an
*employee share scheme in circumstances
specified as relevant in section 208-215; and
(c) the recipient does not hold that share as a trustee.
The question whether a company is a subsidiary of
another company is to be determined in the same way as the question
whether a corporation is a subsidiary of another corporation is determined under
the Corporations Act 2001.
A *share in a
*company is acquired by a person under an
*employee share scheme in circumstances that
are relevant for the purposes of paragraph 208-205(b) and 208-235(b)
if:
(a) the share is acquired by the person in respect of, or for or in
relation directly or indirectly to, any employment of the person by the entity
or by an entity that is a *subsidiary of the
company; and
(b) all the shares available for acquisition under the scheme are ordinary
shares or are preference shares to which are attached substantially the same
rights as are attached to ordinary shares; and
(c) immediately after the acquisition of the shares:
(i) the person does not hold a legal or beneficial interest in more than
5% of the shares in the company; and
(ii) the person is not in a position to control, or control the casting
of, more than 5% of the maximum number of votes that might be cast at a general
meeting of the company; and
(d) the share is not a *non-equity
share.
Generally, a distribution franked with an exempting credit will only
generate a tax effect for the recipient under Division 207 if a tax effect
would have been generated for the recipient had the recipient received a franked
distribution when the distributing entity was an exempting entity.
Table of sections
Operative provisions
208-225 Division 207 does not generally
apply
208-230 Distributions to exempting entities and former
exempting entities
208-235 Distributions to employees acquiring shares under an
eligible employee share scheme
208-240 Distributions to certain
individuals
[This is the end of the Guide.]
Division 207 does not apply to a
*distribution
*franked with an exempting credit, unless the
Division is expressly applied to the distribution under this
Subdivision.
Division 207 applies to a
*distribution
*franked with an exempting credit by a
*former exempting entity as if it were a
*franked distribution if:
(a) the recipient of the distribution is a former exempting entity and the
distribution gives rise to an *exempting credit
for the recipient; or
(b) the recipient of the distribution is an
*exempting entity and the distribution gives
rise to a *franking credit for the recipient;
or
(c) the distribution *flows indirectly to
a former exempting entity and gives rise to an exempting credit for that entity;
or
(d) the distribution flows indirectly to an exempting entity and gives
rise to a franking credit for that entity.
Division 207 also applies to a
*distribution
*franked with an exempting credit made by a
*former exempting entity as if it were a
*franked distribution if:
(a) the distribution is made to a person who is an employee of the former
exempting entity, or of a *company that is a
*subsidiary of the former exempting entity, at
the time the distribution is made; and
(b) the recipient acquired the *share on
which the distribution is made under an
*employee share scheme in circumstances
specified as relevant in section 208-215; and
(c) the recipient does not hold that share as a trustee.
Division 207 also applies to a
*distribution
*franked with an exempting credit made by a
*former exempting entity as if it were a
*franked distribution if:
(a) a *corporate tax entity other than a
former exempting entity became an *exempting
entity; and
(b) immediately before the entity became an exempting entity all the
accountable membership interests and accountable partial interests were
beneficially owned (whether directly or indirectly) by natural persons who were
*Australian residents; and
(c) the entity became an exempting entity because some or all of the
persons mentioned in paragraph (b) ceased to be Australian residents;
and
(d) the entity becomes a former exempting entity because all of the
persons mentioned in paragraph (b) are or have become Australian residents;
and
(e) an amount attributable to a distribution
*franked with an exempting credit made by the
entity is included in the assessable income of such a person; and
(f) all the accountable membership interests or accountable partial
interests in the entity were, throughout the period beginning when the entity
became an exempting entity and ending when the amount was received by the
person, beneficially owned (directly or indirectly) by the person mentioned in
paragraph (b); and
(g) the person is an eligible continuing substantial member in relation to
the distribution.
16 After
section 960-135
Insert:
A *membership interest in a
*corporate tax entity is an ordinary
membership interest if:
(a) in the case of a membership interest in a
*company—it is an ordinary share;
and
(b) in the case of a membership interest in a
*corporate limited partnership—it is an
interest in the income of the partnership; and
(c) in the case of a membership interest in a
*corporate unit trust or
*public trading trust—it is a unit in the
trust.
17 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
accountable membership interest has the meaning given by
section 208-30.
18 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
accountable partial interest has the meaning given by
section 208-35.
19 Subsection 995-1(1) (definition of
deficit)
Repeal the definition, substitute:
deficit:
(a) section 205-40 sets out when a
*franking account is in deficit; and
(b) section 208-125 sets out when an
*exempting account is in deficit.
20 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
eligible continuing substantial member of a
*former exempting entity has the meaning given
by section 208-155.
21 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
exempting account means an account that arises under
section 208-110.
22 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
exempting credit has the meaning given by
section 208-115.
23 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
exempting debit has the meaning given by
section 208-120.
24 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
exempting deficit has the meaning given by subsection
208-125(2).
25 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
exempting entity has the meaning given by
section 208-20.
26 Subsection 995-1(1)
exempting percentage has the meaning given by
section 208-95.
27 Subsection 995-1(1)
exempting surplus has the meaning given by subsection
208-125(1).
28 Subsection 995-1(1) (at the end of the
definition of flows indirectly)
Add:
; and (c) section 208-175 sets out the circumstances in which a
*distribution
*franked with an exempting credit flows
indirectly to an entity.
29 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
former exempting entity has the meaning given by
section 208-50.
30 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
franks with an exempting credit has the meaning given by
section 208-60.
31 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
partial interest in a
*corporate tax entity has the
meaning given by subsection 208-25(3).
32 Subsection 995-1(1) (paragraphs (a), (b)
and (c) of the definition of residency requirement)
Repeal the paragraphs, substitute:
(a) for an entity making a
*distribution—has the meaning given by
section 202-20; and
(b) for an income year in which, or in relation to which, an event
specified in a table in one of the following sections occurs:
(i) section 205-15 (general table of
*franking credits);
(ii) section 205-30 (general table of
*franking debits);
(iii) section 208-115 (table of
*exempting credits);
(iv) section 208-120 (table of
*exempting debits);
(v) section 208-130 (table of franking credits that arise because of
an entity’s status as a *former exempting
entity or *exempting entity);
(vi) section 208-145 (table of franking debits that arise because of
an entity’s status as a former exempting entity or exempting entity);
and
(c) for an entity receiving a distribution—has the meaning given by
section 207-75; and
33 Subsection 995-1(1) (definition of share
of a franking credit)
Repeal the definition, substitute:
share:
(a) of a *franking credit—has the
meaning given by section 207-55; and
(b) of an *exempting credit—has the
meaning given by section 208-180.
34 Subsection 995-1(1) (definition of
surplus)
Repeal the definition, substitute:
surplus:
(a) section 205-40 sets out when a
*franking account is in surplus; and
(b) section 208-125 sets out when an
*exempting account is in surplus.
Part 1—Income
Tax Assessment Act 1997
1 Section 165-115
Repeal the section, substitute:
If a change occurs in the ownership or control of a company that has an
unrealised net loss, the company cannot, to the extent of the unrealised net
loss, have capital losses taken into account, or deduct revenue losses, in
respect of CGT events that happen to CGT assets that it owned at the time of the
change, unless it satisfies the same business test.
(1) A company is exempt from these rules if, at the time of the change in
ownership or control, it (together with certain related entities) has a net
asset value of not more than $5,000,000 under the test in section 152-15
(for small business CGT relief).
(2) In working out whether it has an unrealised net loss, a company can
choose to work out the market value of each of its assets individually, or of
all of its assets together.
(3) If a company works out the market value of each of its assets
individually, it may choose to exclude every asset that it acquired for less
than $10,000, in which case:
(a) unrealised losses and gains on the excluded assets will not be taken
into account in calculating the company’s unrealised net loss;
and
(b) losses on the excluded assets will be allowed without the company
being subject to the same business test.
2 At the end of subsection
165-115A(1B)
Add:
However, the choice does not affect the application of the
*global method of working out whether the
company has an unrealised net loss (see subsection 165-115E(2)).
3 Section 165-115E
After “this way”, insert “(the individual asset
method), unless the company chooses to work it out using the
*global method (set out in
subsection (2))”.
4 At the end of
section 165-115E
Add:
(2) The global method of working out whether the company has
an unrealised net loss at the relevant time is as
follows:
Method statement
Step 1. Work out the total market value of all
*CGT assets that the company owned at the
relevant time (including those it *acquired for
less than $10,000), using a valuation method that would generally be regarded as
appropriate in the circumstances.
Step 2. Work out the total of the
*cost bases of those
*CGT assets at the relevant time.
Note: If a CGT asset that the company owned at the relevant
time was also trading stock or a revenue asset at that time, see
subsection (3) of this section.
Step 3. If the step 2 amount exceeds the step 1 amount, the excess
is the company’s preliminary unrealised net loss at the
relevant time.
Step 4. Add up the company’s preliminary unrealised net loss
and any *capital loss, deduction or share of a
deduction disregarded under section 170-270 in relation to an asset
referred to in paragraph 165-115A(1A)(b). The total is the company’s
unrealised net loss at the relevant time.
(3) If:
(a) a *CGT asset that the company owned
at the relevant time was also *trading stock or
a *revenue asset at that time; and
(b) the asset’s *cost base at the
relevant time is less than the amount that would be compared under
section 165-115F with the asset’s market value in working out a
notional revenue gain or notional revenue loss that the company has at the
relevant time in respect of the asset;
then, for the purposes of step 2 of the method statement in
subsection (2) of this section, the amount that would be so compared is to
be taken into account instead of that cost base.
(4) A choice to use the *global method
must be made on or before:
(a) the day on which the company lodges its income tax return for the
income year in which the relevant time occurred; or
(b) such later day as the Commissioner allows.
5 Subsection 165-115F(7)
Repeal the subsection.
6 Section 165-115G
Repeal the section, substitute:
This Subdivision prevents multiple recognition of a company’s losses
when significant equity and debt interests that entities (not individuals) have
in the company are realised.
(1) The operation of this Subdivision is triggered at an alteration time,
which is when:
(a) an alteration takes place in the ownership or control of the company;
or
(b) the liquidator of the company declares that shares in the company are
worthless (CGT event G3).
(2) An alteration time is the trigger for making reductions and other
adjustments to the reduced cost base of significant equity and debt interests in
the company that are owned by an entity (not an individual) that, alone or with
its associates, has a controlling stake in the company and either:
(a) has a direct or indirect equity interest of at least 10% in the
company; or
(b) is owed a debt of at least $10,000 by the company or by another entity
that has a significant equity or debt interest in the company.
Deductions that relate to such interests held as trading stock or otherwise
on revenue account are also reduced.
(3) Adjustments may also be made when such an entity’s interests in
the company are partly realised within 12 months before an alteration time or
if, under an arrangement, such interests are realised partly within that period
or at the alteration time and partly at an earlier time.
(4) However, entities in which there are no interests in respect of which
the company’s losses have been, or can be, duplicated are not affected by
this Subdivision.
(1) Adjustments are based on the overall loss of the company. This
comprises its realised losses and unrealised losses on CGT assets.
(2) Special rules, directed at saving compliance costs, apply to determine
whether unrealised losses have to be counted at an alteration time and, if so,
how to work them out.
(3) The company may not have to calculate its unrealised losses if the
alteration time is not also a changeover time for the purposes of
Subdivision 165-CC (about change of ownership or control of a company that
has an unrealised net loss), and the company has no realised losses.
(4) The company does not have to count unrealised losses at an alteration
time if (together with certain related entities) it has a net asset value of not
more than $5,000,000 under the test in section 152-15 (for small business
CGT relief).
(5) In working out its unrealised losses on CGT assets, the company can
choose to work out the market value of each of its assets individually, or of
all of its assets together.
(6) If the company works out the market value of each of its assets
individually, unrealised losses on assets acquired for less than $10,000 do not
have to be calculated at any time.
(7) Amounts (whether realised or unrealised) counted at a previous
alteration time are not counted again at a later alteration time. (This does not
apply to unrealised losses worked out by reference to the market value of all
the company’s assets together.)
(8) However, if unrealised amounts are not counted at a previous
alteration time (for example, because of the $10,000 or small business entity
exclusions) and are not required to be taken into account in adjustments made at
that time, they may be counted at a later time as part of a realised
loss.
(9) A formula is provided for making adjustments in straightforward cases
if applying the formula gives a reasonable result having regard to the object of
the Subdivision. Otherwise, reasonable adjustments must be made having regard to
a number of stated factors.
(10) To help entities to make the adjustments, any entity that, in its own
right, has a controlling stake in the company is required to provide a written
notice to its associates setting out relevant information. In limited
circumstances, the company itself may have to provide a written notice to
entities that, to its knowledge, have a significant equity or debt interest in
it.
7 After subsection
165-115R(6)
Insert:
(6A) Subsection (6) does not apply to paragraphs (3)(e) and
(5)(e) if the company has chosen to use the
*global method of working out whether it has an
adjusted unrealised loss at the alteration time.
8 After subsection
165-115S(6)
Insert:
(6A) Subsection (6) does not apply to paragraphs (3)(c) and
(5)(c) if the company has chosen to use the
*global method of working out whether it has an
adjusted unrealised loss at the current alteration time.
9 At the end of
section 165-115T
Add:
(2) Subsection (1) does not apply to an adjusted unrealised loss that
the company had at a previous alteration time if the company has chosen to use
the *global method of working out whether it
has an adjusted unrealised loss at that previous time.
10 Subsection 165-115U(1)
After “this way”, insert “(the individual asset
method), unless the company chooses to work it out using the
*global method (set out in
subsection (1B))”.
11 After subsection
165-115U(1)
Insert:
(1A) Step 1 in the method statement in subsection (1) does not apply
to an amount that was counted at an earlier alteration time if the company has
chosen to use the *global method of working out
whether it has an adjusted unrealised loss at that earlier time.
(1B) The global method of working out whether the company
has an adjusted unrealised loss at the relevant alteration time is
as follows:
Method statement
Step 1. Work out the total market value of all
*CGT assets that the company owned at the
relevant alteration time (including those it
*acquired for less than $10,000), using a
valuation method that would generally be regarded as appropriate in the
circumstances.
Step 2. Work out the total of the
*cost bases of those
*CGT assets at the relevant time.
Note: If a CGT asset that the company owned at the relevant
time was also trading stock or a revenue asset at that time, see
subsection (1C) of this section.
Step 3. If the step 2 amount exceeds the step 1 amount, the excess
is the company’s adjusted unrealised loss at the relevant
time.
(1C) If:
(a) a *CGT asset that the company owned
at the relevant alteration time was also
*trading stock or a
*revenue asset at that time; and
(b) the asset’s *cost base at the
relevant alteration time is less than the amount that, if the relevant
alteration time were a changeover time, would be compared under
section 165-115F with the asset’s market value in working out a
notional revenue gain or notional revenue loss that the company would have at
the changeover time in respect of the asset;
then, for the purposes of step 2 of the method statement in
subsection (1B) of this section, the amount that would be so compared is to
be taken into account instead of that cost base.
(1D) A choice to use the *global method
must be made on or before:
(a) the day on which the company lodges its income tax return for the
income year in which the relevant alteration time occurred; or
(b) such later day as the Commissioner allows.
12 Subsection 165-115V(8)
Repeal the subsection.
13 After subsection
165-115W(1)
Insert:
(1A) Step 2 in the method statement in subsection (1) does not apply
to an amount counted at an earlier alteration time if the company has chosen to
use the *global method of working out whether
it has an adjusted unrealised loss at that earlier time.
14 At the end of subsection
165-115ZA(1)
Add:
Note: This section and section 165-115ZB can apply
differently for a company that has used the global method of working out whether
it has an adjusted unrealised loss at an alteration time. See
section 165-115ZD.
15 At the end of
Subdivision 165-CD
Add:
(1) This section affects how sections 165-115ZA and 165-115ZB apply
to an interest (the equity) in, or a debt owed by, a company if,
apart from this section, a loss:
(a) would be *realised for income tax
purposes by a *realisation event that happens
to the equity or debt; or
(b) would be so realised but for Subdivision 170-D (which defers
realisation of capital losses and deductions);
and the company chose to use the *global
method of working out whether it had an adjusted unrealised loss at the last
alteration time:
(c) that happened for the company before the realisation event;
and
(d) immediately before which the equity or debt was, or was part
of:
(i) if the company was a *loss company at
that alteration time—a relevant equity interest, or a relevant debt
interest, that an entity had in the company; or
(ii) otherwise—what would have been such an interest if the company
had been a loss company at that alteration time.
Note: If that last alteration time is before the day on
which the New Business Tax System (Consolidation, Value Shifting, Demergers
and Other Measures) Act 2002 received the Royal Assent, the owner of the
equity or debt may choose to apply section 165-115ZD of the Income Tax
(Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 instead of this section.
(2) In addition to any application to the equity or debt, in relation to
that last alteration time, that sections 165-115ZA and 165-115ZB have apart
from this section, those sections apply (and are taken always to have applied)
to the equity or debt, in relation to that last alteration time, as
if:
(a) the company had an adjusted unrealised loss at that time worked out
under this section; and
(b) the company were therefore a *loss
company at that time; and
(c) that adjusted unrealised loss were the company’s overall loss at
that time.
(3) For the purposes of how sections 165-115ZA and 165-115ZB apply
because of this section, the adjustment amount under section 165-115ZB is
to be worked out and applied in accordance with subsection 165-115ZB(6) (the
non-formula method).
Adjusted unrealised loss worked out under this section
(4) The adjusted unrealised loss referred to in paragraph (2)(a) is
worked out using this method statement:
Method statement
Step 1. Add up the amount or value of each thing covered by
subsection (5).
Step 2. If the step 1 amount exceeds the loss referred to in
paragraph (1)(a), reduce the step 1 amount by the excess.
Step 3. Reduce the step 2 amount by so much of the loss referred to
in paragraph (1)(a) as it is reasonable to conclude is attributable to
none of these:
(a) a notional capital loss, or a notional revenue loss, that the company
has at that last alteration time in respect of a
*CGT asset;
(b) a trading stock decrease in relation to that time for a CGT asset that
was *trading stock of the company at that
time.
(5) This subsection covers each thing covered by an item in the table,
except to the extent that:
(a) it is reasonable to conclude that the thing was not
attributable to value that is reflected in a notional capital gain or notional
revenue gain that the company has at that last alteration time in respect of a
*CGT asset; or
(b) the thing has resulted in a reduction of the
*reduced cost base of the equity or
debt.
|
Things that might expose an unrealised loss netted off by use of global
method |
|
|---|---|
|
Item |
Thing covered |
|
1 |
A *dividend that the company pays during
the period referred to in subsection (6) |
|
2 |
A thing that is taken under this Act to be a dividend and that the company
pays during the period referred to in subsection (6) |
|
3 |
A distribution of income or capital to a
*member that the company makes during the
period referred to in subsection (6) and is not covered by item 1 or
2 |
|
4 |
An amount of income tax to which the company becomes liable at any time, to
the extent that it is reasonably attributable to a realisation event that
happens, during the period referred to in subsection (6), to a
*CGT asset (in its character as a CGT asset,
*trading stock or a
*revenue asset) that the company owned at that
last alteration time and *acquired for not less
than $10,000 |
|
5 |
A loss or outgoing to which the company becomes liable at any time, to the
extent that it is reasonably attributable to a realisation event of the kind
referred to in item 4 |
|
6 |
The difference between: but only if those capital proceeds are less than that market
value |
(6) The period starts at that last alteration time and ends at the earlier
of:
(a) the time of the *realisation event
referred to in paragraph (1)(a); or
(b) the time immediately before the earliest time when the equity or debt
is no longer, or is no longer part of:
(i) if the company was a *loss company at
that last alteration time—a relevant equity interest, or a relevant debt
interest, that an entity has in the company; or
(ii) otherwise—what would have been such an interest if the company
had been a loss company at that last alteration time.
(7) For the purposes of item 6 of the table in subsection (5),
the *capital proceeds of the
*CGT event are to be worked out:
(a) under subsection 116-20(1) only; and
(b) disregarding subsection 103-10(1) and paragraph 103-10(2)(a) (about
entitlement to receive money or property).
Notices under section 165-115ZC not affected
(8) To avoid doubt:
(a) a notice need not be given under section 165-115ZC because of
this section; and
(b) this section does not affect the requirements that apply to a notice
that otherwise must be given under that section.
Part 2—Income
Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997
16 Before
Subdivision 165-C
Insert:
A choice under section 165-115E of the Income Tax Assessment Act
1997 to use the global method of working out whether a company has an
unrealised net loss at a particular time must be made within 6 months after the
day on which the New Business Tax System (Consolidation, Value Shifting,
Demergers and Other Measures) Act 2002 received the Royal Assent
if:
(a) that time is before that day; and
(b) subsection 165-115E(4) of that Act would otherwise require the choice
to be made before the end of those 6 months.
Table of sections
165-115U Choice to use global method to work out adjusted
unrealised loss
165-115ZC When certain notices to be given
165-115ZD Adjustment (or further adjustment) for interest
realised at a loss after global method has been used
A choice under section 165-115U of the Income Tax Assessment Act
1997 to use the global method of working out whether a company has an
adjusted unrealised loss at a particular time must be made within 6 months after
the day on which the New Business Tax System (Consolidation, Value Shifting,
Demergers and Other Measures) Act 2002 received the Royal Assent
if:
(a) that time is before that day; and
(b) subsection 165-115U(1D) of that Act would otherwise require the choice
to be made before the end of those 6 months.
(1) A notice under subsection 165-115ZC(4) or (5) of the Income Tax
Assessment Act 1997 must be given within 6 months after the day on which the
New Business Tax System (Consolidation, Value Shifting, Demergers and Other
Measures) Act 2002 received the Royal Assent if the alteration time is
before that day.
(2) If, because of amendments made by Schedule 14 to the New
Business Tax System (Consolidation, Value Shifting, Demergers and Other
Measures) Act 2002, a notice already given under subsection 165-115ZC(4) or
(5) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 before the day referred to in
subsection (1) of this section no longer complies with
section 165-115ZC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997, the entity
required to give the notice may comply with that section 165-115ZC by
giving a further notice.
(3) The further notice:
(a) must vary the notice referred to in subsection (2) in such a way
(which may include setting out additional information) that the notice as varied
complies with section 165-115ZC of the Income Tax Assessment Act
1997 as affected by the amendments; and
(b) must be given within the 6 months referred to in subsection (1)
of this section, or within a further period allowed by the Commissioner;
and
(c) must otherwise be given in accordance with that section.
(1) This section affects how sections 165-115ZA and 165-115ZB of the
Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 apply to an interest (the
equity) in, or a debt owed by, a company if apart from this
section, a loss:
(a) would be realised for income tax purposes by a realisation event that
happens to the equity or debt; or
(b) would be so realised but for Subdivision 170-D of that Act (which
defers realisation of capital losses and deductions);
and the company chose to use the global method of working out whether it
had an adjusted unrealised loss at the last alteration time:
(c) that happened for the company, before the realisation event;
and
(d) immediately before which the equity or debt was, or was part
of:
(i) if the company was a loss company at that alteration time—a
relevant equity interest, or a relevant debt interest, that an entity had in the
company; or
(ii) otherwise—what would have been such an interest if the company
had been a loss company at that alteration time;
and these conditions are satisfied:
(e) that last alteration time is before the day on which the New
Business Tax System (Consolidation, Value Shifting, Demergers and Other
Measures) Act 2002 received the Royal Assent; and
(f) the entity that owns the equity or debt immediately before the
realisation event chooses to apply this section to the equity or debt, in
relation to that last alteration time, instead of section 165-115ZD of the
Income Tax Assessment Act 1997; and
(g) the choice is made on or before the latest of these:
(i) the last day of the period of 6 months after the day referred to in
paragraph (c) of this subsection;
(ii) the day on which the entity lodges its income tax return for the
income year in which the realisation event occurred;
(iii) such later day as the Commissioner allows.
If the entity makes that choice, this section applies accordingly instead
of that section.
(2) In addition to any application to the equity or debt, in relation to
that last alteration time, that sections 165-115ZA and 165-115ZB of the
Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 have apart from this section, those
sections apply (and are taken always to have applied) to the equity or debt, in
relation to that last alteration time, as if:
(a) the company had an adjusted unrealised loss at that time equal to the
loss referred to in paragraph (1)(a) of this section, except so much of the
loss as it is reasonable to conclude is attributable to none of
these:
(i) a notional capital loss, or a notional revenue loss, that the company
has at that last alteration time in respect of a CGT asset;
(ii) a trading stock decrease in relation to that time for a CGT asset
that was trading stock of the company at that time; and
(b) the company were therefore a *loss
company at that time; and
(c) that adjusted unrealised loss were the company’s overall loss at
that time.
(3) For the purposes of how sections 165-115ZA and 165-115ZB of the
Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 apply because of this section, the
adjustment amount under section 165-115ZB of that Act is to be worked out
and applied in accordance with subsection 165-115ZB(6) (the non-formula method)
of that Act.
(4) To avoid doubt:
(a) a notice need not be given under section 165-115ZC of the
Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 because of this section; and
(b) this section does not affect the requirements that apply to a notice
that otherwise must be given under that section.
Income Tax Assessment Act
1997
17 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
global method:
(a) of working out whether a company has an unrealised net loss at a
particular time, has the meaning given by section 165-115E; and
(b) of working out whether a company has an adjusted unrealised loss at a
particular time, has the meaning given by section 165-115U.
18 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
individual asset method:
(a) of working out whether a company has an unrealised net loss at a
particular time, has the meaning given by section 165-115E; and
(b) of working out whether a company has an adjusted unrealised loss at a
particular time, has the meaning given by section 165-115U.
Part 4—Application
of amendments
19 Application
The amendments made by this Schedule apply to a time at or after 1 pm (by
legal time in the Australian Capital Territory) on 11 November
1999.
Part 1—New
Divisions inserted in the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997
1 After Part 3-45
Insert:
Table of Subdivisions
723-A Reduction in loss from realising non-depreciating asset
723-B Reducing reduced cost base of interests in entity that acquires
non-depreciating asset under roll-over
Table of sections
723-1 Object
723-10 Reduction in loss from realising non-depreciating
asset over which right has been created
723-15 Reduction in loss from realising non-depreciating
asset at the same time as right is created over it
723-20 Exceptions
723-25 Realisation event that is only a partial
realisation
723-35 Multiple rights created to take advantage of the
$50,000 threshold
723-40 Application to CGT asset that is also trading stock
or revenue asset
723-50 Effects if right created over underlying asset is
also trading stock or a revenue asset
The purpose of this Division is to reduce a loss that would otherwise be
*realised for income tax purposes by a
*realisation event happening to an asset
(except a *depreciating asset), to the extent
that:
(a) value has been shifted out of the asset by the owner creating in an
associate a right over the asset; and
(b) the value shifted was not brought to tax when the right was created
and has not since been brought to tax on a realisation of the right.
(1) A loss that would, apart from this Division, be
*realised for income
tax purposes by a *realisation event is reduced
by the amount worked out under subsections (3) and (4) if:
(a) the event happens to a *CGT asset
(the underlying asset) you own that, at the time of the event (the
realisation time):
(i) is not a *depreciating asset;
or
(ii) is an item of your *trading stock;
or
(iii) is a *revenue asset of yours;
and
(b) before the realisation time:
(i) you created in an
*associate of yours; or
(ii) an entity covered by subsection (2) (about previous owners of
the underlying asset) created in an associate of the entity;
a right in respect of the underlying asset; and
(c) immediately before the realisation time, the right is still in
existence and is owned by an associate of yours; and
(d) a decrease in the underlying asset’s market value is reasonably
attributable to the creating of the right; and
(e) creating the right involved a *CGT
event:
(i) whose *capital proceeds are
less than the market value of the right when created (the difference
between those capital proceeds and that market value is called the
shortfall on creating the right); and
(ii) that is not a CGT event that happens to some part of the
underlying asset but not to the remainder of it; and
(f) the shortfall on creating the right is more than $50,000;
and
(g) the market value of the underlying asset at the realisation time is
less than it would have been if the right no longer existed at that time (the
difference is called the deficit on realisation).
Note: If subparagraph (1)(e)(ii) applies, the cost base
and reduced cost base of the underlying asset is apportioned under
section 112-30, so there is no need for this section to apply to the
right.
(2) This subsection covers an entity if:
(a) the entity *acquired the underlying
asset before you did; and
(b) there has been a roll-over for each
*CGT event (if any) as a result of which an
entity (including you) acquired the asset after the first entity acquired it,
and before the realisation time; and
(c) for each such CGT event (if any), the entity (including you) that
acquired the underlying asset as a result of the event was, immediately after
the event, an *associate of the entity that
last acquired the asset before the event.
(3) The amount by which this section reduces the loss is the lesser
of:
(a) the shortfall on creating the right; and
(b) the deficit on realisation.
However, that amount is reduced by each gain that:
(c) is *realised for income tax purposes
by a *realisation event that happens to the
right:
(i) before or at the realisation time for the underlying asset;
and
(ii) at a time when the right is owned by an entity that is your
*associate immediately before the realisation
time for the underlying asset; and
(d) is not disregarded.
Note: To work out a gain realised for income tax purposes by
a realisation event that happens to the right, see sections 977-15, 977-35,
977-40 and 977-55. If more than one of those sections applies to the right, see
section 723-50.
(4) For each gain that:
(a) is *realised for income tax purposes
by a *realisation event that happens to the
right:
(i) within 4 years after the realisation time for the underlying asset;
and
(ii) at a time when the right is owned by an entity that is your
*associate immediately before the realisation
time for the underlying asset; and
(b) is not disregarded;
the amount worked out under subsection (3) is taken to have been
reduced by the amount of that gain.
Note: This subsection may result in amendment of an
assessment for the income year in which the realisation time
happens.
(1) A loss that would, apart from this Division, be
*realised for income tax purposes by a
*realisation event is reduced by the amount
worked out under subsections (2) and (3) if:
(a) the event happens to a *CGT asset
(the underlying asset) you own that, at the time of the event (the
realisation time):
(i) is not a *depreciating asset;
or
(ii) is an item of your *trading
stock;
(iii) is a *revenue asset of yours;
and
(b) at the realisation time, you create in an
*associate of yours a right in respect of the
underlying asset; and
(c) creating the right involves a *CGT
event:
(i) whose *capital proceeds are
less than the market value of the right when created (the difference
between those capital proceeds and that market value is called the
shortfall on creating the right); and
(ii) that is not a CGT event that happens to some part of the
underlying asset but not to the remainder of it; and
(d) the shortfall on creating the right is more than $50,000;
and
(e) the market value of the underlying asset at the realisation time is
less than it would have been if the right had not been created (the difference
is called the deficit on realisation).
Note: If subparagraph (1)(c)(ii) applies, the cost base
and reduced cost base of the underlying asset is apportioned under
section 112-30, so there is no need for this section to apply to the
right.
(2) The amount by which this section reduces the loss is the lesser
of:
(a) the shortfall on creating the right; and
(b) the deficit on realisation.
(3) For each gain that:
(a) is *realised for income tax purposes
by a *realisation event that happens to the
right:
(i) within 4 years after the realisation time for the underlying asset;
and
(ii) at a time when the right is owned by an entity that is your
*associate immediately before the realisation
time for the underlying asset; and
(b) is not disregarded;
the amount worked out under subsection (2) is taken to have been
reduced by the amount of that gain.
Note 1: To work out a gain realised for income tax purposes
by a realisation event that happens to the right, see sections 977-15,
977-35, 977-40 and 977-55. If more than one of those sections applies to the
right, see section 723-50.
Note 2: This subsection may require amendment of an
assessment for the income year in which the realisation time
happens.
Conservation covenant over land
(1) Section 723-10 or 723-15 does not reduce a loss if:
(a) the underlying asset is land; and
(b) the right referred to in paragraph 723-10(1)(b) or 723-15(1)(b) is a
*conservation covenant over the land.
Right created on death of owner
(2) Section 723-10 or 723-15 does not reduce a loss if the right
referred to in paragraph 723-10(1)(b) or 723-15(1)(b) is created by:
(a) a will or codicil; or
(b) an order of a court varying or modifying a will or codicil;
or
(c) a total or partial intestacy; or
(d) an order of a court varying or modifying the application of the law
about distributing the estate of someone who dies intestate.
(1) Section 723-10 or 723-15 applies differently if:
(a) a *realisation event happens to some
part of a *CGT asset (the underlying
asset) you own that, at the time of the event:
(i) is not a *depreciating asset;
or
(ii) is an item of your *trading stock;
or
(iii) is a *revenue asset of
yours;
but not to the remainder of the underlying asset; or
(b) a realisation event consists of creating an interest in a CGT asset
(also the underlying asset) you own that, at the time of the
event, is covered by subparagraph (a)(i), (ii) or (iii).
(2) The section applies on the basis that:
(a) the *realisation event happens to the
underlying asset; and
(b) the shortfall on creating the right referred to in paragraph
723-10(1)(e) or 723-15(1)(c); and
(c) the deficit on realisation referred to in paragraph 723-10(1)(g) or
723-15(1)(e);
are each reduced by multiplying its amount by this fraction:![]()
(3) For the purposes of the formula in subsection (2):
market value of part means the market value, at the time of
the *realisation event, of the part referred to
in paragraph (1)(a) or the interest referred to in paragraph (1)(b),
as appropriate.
market value of underlying asset means the market value,
immediately before the *realisation event, of
the underlying asset.
[The next section is section 723-35.]
(1) Sections 723-10 and 723-15 apply differently if, having regard to
all relevant circumstances, it is reasonable to conclude that the sole or main
reason why a right was created as a different right from one or more other
rights created in respect of the same thing was so that paragraph 723-10(1)(f)
or 723-15(1)(d) would not be satisfied for one or more of the rights mentioned
in this subsection.
(2) Those sections:
(a) apply to that thing, in relation to each of the rights mentioned in
subsection (1) of this section, as if paragraphs 723-10(1)(f) and
723-15(1)(d) were omitted; and
(b) are taken always to have so applied.
If a *CGT asset you own is also an item
of your *trading stock or a
*revenue asset, this Division applies to the
asset once in its character as a CGT asset and again in its character as trading
stock or a revenue asset.
[The next section is section 723-50.]
(1) Subsection 723-10(3) or (4) or 723-15(3) applies differently if the
right created in respect of the underlying asset is also
*trading stock or a
*revenue asset at the time of a
*realisation event that happens to the
right.
(2) The gain that is taken into account for the purposes of that
subsection is:
(a) if the right is also trading stock—worked out under
section 977-35 or 977-40 (about realisation events for trading stock);
or
(b) if the right is also a revenue asset—the greater of:
(i) the gain worked out under section 977-15 (about realisation
events for CGT assets); and
(ii) the gain worked out under section 977-55 (about realisation
events for revenue assets).
Table of sections
723-105 Reduced cost base of interest reduced when interest
realised at a loss
723-110 Direct and indirect roll-over replacement for
underlying asset
(1) The *reduced cost base of a
*primary equity interest,
*secondary equity interest, or
*indirect primary equity interest, in a company
or trust is reduced just before a *realisation
event that is a *CGT event happens to the
interest if:
(a) apart from this Division, a loss would be
*realised for income tax purposes by the CGT
event; and
(b) apart from this Division, a loss would have been
*realised for income tax purposes by a
realisation event if the event had happened, just before the CGT event, to a
*CGT asset (the underlying asset)
that the company or trust then owned and that:
(i) was not then a *depreciating
asset; or
(ii) was then an item of *trading stock
of the company or trust; or
(iii) was then a *revenue asset of the
company or trust; and
(c) the loss referred to in paragraph (b) would have been reduced
under Subdivision 723-A by an amount (the underlying asset loss
reduction); and
(d) for the entity (the transferor) that owned the interest
just before the CGT event, the interest was a
*direct roll-over replacement or
*indirect roll-over replacement for the
underlying asset.
(2) If the interest was a *direct
roll-over replacement, its *reduced cost base
is reduced by the amount worked out using this formula, unless that amount does
not appropriately reflect the matters referred to in
subsection (4):
(3) For the purposes of the formula in subsection (2):
RCB of interest means the interest’s
*reduced cost base when the transferor
*acquired it.
total of RCBs of direct roll-over replacements means the
total of the *reduced cost bases of all
*direct roll-over replacements for the
underlying asset when the transferor *acquired
them.
(4) If:
(a) the interest was an *indirect
roll-over replacement; or
(b) the amount worked out under subsection (2) does not appropriately
reflect the matters referred to in this subsection;
the interest’s *reduced cost base is
reduced by an amount that is appropriate having regard to these
matters:
(c) the underlying asset loss reduction; and
(d) the quantum of the interest relative to all
*direct roll-over replacements and indirect
roll-over replacements that the transferor owns or has previously
owned.
(1) For an entity (the transferor) that owns a
*CGT asset, the CGT asset is a direct
roll-over replacement for something (the underlying asset)
that another entity owns if, and only if:
(a) a *CGT event happened to the
underlying asset while the transferor owned it; and
(b) the other entity *acquired the
underlying asset as a result of that CGT event; and
(c) there was a *replacement-asset
roll-over for the CGT event; and
(d) the transferor received the CGT asset (or CGT assets including it) in
respect of the CGT event as the replacement asset (or the replacement
assets).
(3) For an entity (the transferor) that owns a
*CGT asset, the CGT asset is an indirect
roll-over replacement for something (the underlying asset)
that another entity owns if, and only if:
(a) a *CGT event happened to another CGT
asset at a time when the transferor owned it and the other entity already owned
the underlying asset; and
(b) for the transferor, the other CGT asset was at that time:
(i) a *direct roll-over replacement for
the underlying asset; or
(ii) an indirect roll-over replacement for the underlying asset because of
any other application or applications of this subsection; and
(c) there was a *replacement-asset
roll-over for the CGT event; and
(d) the transferor received the first CGT asset (or CGT assets including
it) in respect of the CGT event as the replacement asset (or the replacement
assets).
Table of Subdivisions
Guide to Division 725
725-A Scope of the direct value shifting rules
725-B What is a direct value shift
725-C Consequences of a direct value shift
725-D Consequences for down interest or up interest as CGT asset
725-E Consequences for down interest or up interest as trading stock or a
revenue asset
725-F Value adjustments and taxed gains
If, under a scheme, value is shifted from equity or loan interests in a
company or trust to other equity or loan interests in the same company or trust
(including interests issued at a discount), this Division:
(a) adjusts the value of those interests for income tax purposes to take
account of material changes in market value that are attributable to the value
shift; and
(b) treats the value shift as a partial realisation to the extent that
value is shifted between interests held by different owners, and in some other
cases.
However, it does so only for interests that are owned by entities involved
in the value shift.
725-45 Main object
725-50 When a direct value shift has consequences under this
Division
725-55 Controlling entity test
725-65 Cause of the value shift
725-70 Consequences for down interest only if there is a
material decrease in its market value
725-80 Who is an affected owner of a down
interest?
725-85 Who is an affected owner of an up
interest?
725-90 Direct value shift that will be
reversed
725-95 Direct value shift resulting from
reversal
(1) The main object of this Division is:
(a) to prevent inappropriate losses from arising on the realisation of
*equity or loan interests from which value has
been shifted to other equity or loan interests in the same entity; and
(b) to prevent inappropriate gains from arising on the realisation of
equity or loan interests in the same entity to which the value has been
shifted;
so far as those interests are owned by entities involved in the value
shift.
(2) This is done by:
(a) adjusting the value of those interests for income tax purposes to take
account of changes in market value that are attributable to the value shift;
and
(b) treating the value shift as a partial realisation to the extent that
value is shifted:
(i) between interests held by different owners; or
(ii) in the case of interests in their character as CGT assets—from
post-CGT assets to pre-CGT assets; or
(iii) between interests of different characters.
A *direct value shift under a
*scheme involving
*equity or loan interests in an entity (the
target entity) has consequences for you under this Division if,
and only if:
(a) the target entity is a company or trust at some time during the
*scheme period; and
(b) section 725-55 (Controlling entity test) is satisfied;
and
(c) section 725-65 (Cause of the value shift) is satisfied;
and
(d) you are an *affected owner of a
*down interest, or an
*affected owner of an
*up interest, or both; and
(e) neither of sections 725-90 and 725-95 (about direct value shifts
that are reversed) applies.
Note: For a down interest of which you are an affected
owner, the direct value shift has consequences under this Division only if
section 725-70 (about material decrease in market value) is
satisfied.
An entity (the controller) must
*control (for value shifting purposes) the
target entity at some time during the period starting when the
*scheme is entered into and ending when it has
been carried out. (That period is the scheme period.)
[The next section is section 725-65.]
(1) It must be the case that one or more of the following:
(a) the target entity;
(b) the controller;
(c) an entity that was an *associate of
the controller at some time during or after the
*scheme period;
(d) an *active participant in the
*scheme;
(either alone or together with one or more other entities) did under the
scheme the one or more things:
(e) to which the decrease in the market value of the
*down interests is reasonably attributable;
and
(f) to which the increase in the market value of the
*up interests, or the issue of up interests at
a *discount, is reasonably attributable, or
that is or include the issue of up interests at a
*discount.
Active participants (if target entity is closely held)
(2) An entity (the first entity) is an active
participant in the *scheme if, and only
if:
(a) at some time during the *scheme
period, the target entity has fewer than 300 members (in the case of a company)
or fewer than 300 beneficiaries (in the case of a trust); and
(b) the first entity has actively participated in, or directly
facilitated, the entering into or carrying out of the
*scheme (whether or not it did so at the
direction of some other entity); and
(c) the first entity:
(i) owns a *down interest at the
*decrease time; or
(ii) owns an *up interest at the
*increase time or has an up interest issued to
it at a *discount because of the
*direct value shift.
When an entity has 300 or more members or beneficiaries
(3) Section 124-810 (under which certain companies and trusts are not
regarded as having 300 or more members or beneficiaries) also applies for the
purposes of this Division.
(4) In addition, this Division applies to a
*non-fixed trust as if it did not have 300 or
more beneficiaries.
(1) For a *down interest of which you are
an *affected owner, the
*direct value shift has consequences under this
Division only if the sum of the decreases in the market value of all down
interests because of direct value shifts under the same
*scheme as the direct value shift is at least
$150,000.
Note: In working out the sum of the decreases in market
value of all down interests, it will be necessary to include decreases not only
in your down interests, but also in those of other affected owners and of
entities that are not affected owners.
(2) However, if, having regard to all relevant circumstances, it is
reasonable to conclude that the sole or main reason why a
*direct value shift happened under a different
scheme from one or more other direct value shifts was so that
subsection (1) would not be satisfied for one or more of the direct value
shifts mentioned in this subsection, subsection (1) does not apply (and is
taken never to have applied) to any of the direct value shifts.
[The next section is section 725-80.]
An entity is an affected owner of a
*down interest if, and only if, the entity owns
the down interest at the *decrease time and at
least one of these paragraphs is satisfied:
(a) the entity is the controller;
(b) the entity was an *associate of the
controller at some time during or after the
*scheme period;
(c) the entity is an *active participant
in the *scheme.
An entity is an affected owner of an
*up interest if, and only if:
(a) there is at least one *affected owner
of *down interests; and
(b) the entity owns the up interest at the
*increase time, or the interest is an up
interest because it was issued to the entity at a
*discount;
and at least one of these paragraphs is satisfied:
(c) the entity is the controller;
(d) the entity was an *associate of the
controller at some time during or after the
*scheme period;
(e) at some time during or after the scheme period, the entity was an
associate of an entity that is an affected owner of down interests because it
was an associate of the controller at some time during or after that
period;
(f) the entity is an *active participant
in the *scheme.
(1) The *direct value shift does
not have consequences for you under this Division if:
(a) the one or more things referred to in paragraph 725-145(1)(b) brought
about a state of affairs, but for which the direct value shift would not have
happened; and
(b) as at the time referred to in that paragraph, it is more likely than
not that, because of the *scheme, that state of
affairs will cease to exist within 4 years after that time.
Example: Under a scheme, the voting rights attached to a
class of shares in a company are changed. As a result, the market value of
shares in that class decreases, and the market value of other classes of shares
in the company increases. The company’s constitution provides that the
change is to last for only 3 years.
(2) However, this section stops applying if the state of affairs referred
to in paragraph (1)(a) still exists:
(a) at the end of those 4 years; or
(b) when a *realisation event happens to
*down interests or
*up interests of which you are, or any other
entity is, an *affected owner;
whichever happens sooner.
(3) If this section stops applying, it is taken never to have
applied to the *direct value shift.
Note: This may result in an assessment for an earlier income
year having to be amended to give effect to the consequences that the direct
value shift would have had for you under this Division if this section
hadn’t applied.
(1) A *direct value shift does not have
consequences for any entity under this Division if:
(a) section 725-90 applies, and the state of affairs referred to in
paragraph 725-90(1)(a) ceases to exist; and
(b) the direct value shift would not have happened but for that state of
affairs ceasing to exist.
(2) However, if section 725-90 stops applying, this section is taken
never to have applied to the later direct value shift.
725-145 When there is a
direct value shift
725-150 Issue of equity or loan interests at a
discount
725-155 Meaning of down interests,
decrease time, up interests and increase
time
725-160 What is the nature of a direct value
shift?
725-165 If market value decrease or increase is only partly
attributable to the scheme
(1) There is a direct value shift under a
*scheme involving
*equity or loan interests in an entity (the
target entity) if:
(a) there is a decrease in the market value of one or more equity or loan
interests in the target entity; and
(b) the decrease is reasonably attributable to one or more things done
under the scheme, and occurs at or after the time when that thing, or the first
of those things, is done; and
(c) either or both of subsections (2) and (3) are
satisfied.
Examples of something done under a scheme are issuing new shares at a
*discount, buying back shares or changing the
voting rights attached to shares.
(2) One or more
*equity or loan
interests in the target entity must be issued at a
*discount. The issue must be, or must be
reasonably attributable to, the thing, or one or more of the things, referred to
in paragraph (1)(b). It must also occur at or after the time referred to in
that paragraph.
Example: A company runs a family business. There are 2
shares originally issued for $2 each. They are owned by husband and wife. The
market value of the shares is much greater (represented by the value of the
assets of the company less its liabilities). The company issues one more share
for $2 to their son.
Caution is needed in such a situation. The example would
result in a large CGT liability for the husband and wife under this Division,
because they have shifted 1/3 of the value of their own shares to their son. No
such liability would arise if the share had been issued for its market
value.
(3) Or, there must be an increase in the market value of one or more
*equity or loan
interests in the target entity. The increase must be reasonably attributable to
the thing, or to one or more of the things, referred to in
paragraph (1)(b). It must also occur at or after the time referred to in
that paragraph.
(1) An *equity or loan interest is issued
at a discount if, and only if, the market value of the interest
when issued exceeds the amount of the payment that the issuing entity receives.
The excess is the amount of the discount.
(2) The payment that the issuing entity receives can include property. If
it does, use the market value of the property in working out the amount of the
payment.
Amounts for which bonus equities are treated as being
issued
(3) If:
(a) a *primary equity interest is issued
as mentioned in subsection 130-20(1) (about bonus equities issued in relation to
original equities); and
(b) subsection 130-20(3) does not apply (about bonus equities that
are a dividend or otherwise assessable income);
subsection (1) of this section applies to the interest as if the
amount of the payment that the issuing entity receives were equal to the
*cost base of the interest when issued (as
worked out under section 130-20).
(4) If:
(a) a *primary equity interest is issued
as mentioned in subsection 6BA(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936
(about bonus shares issued in relation to original shares); and
(b) subsection 6BA(2) of that Act applies (about bonus shares that are a
dividend);
subsection (1) of this section applies to the interest as if the
amount of the payment that the issuing entity receives were equal to the
consideration worked out under subsection 6BA(2) of that Act.
(5) If both of subsections (3) and (4) apply to the issue of the same
*primary equity interest, subsection (1)
of this section applies to the interest as if the amount of the payment that the
issuing entity receives were equal to the greater of the amounts worked out
under subsections (3) and (4).
Application of subsections (3), (4) and (5)
(6) Subsection (3) does not apply if, for the income year in which
the interest is issued, the issuing entity is:
(a) a corporate unit trust within the meaning of section 102J of the
Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; or
(b) a public trading trust within the meaning of section 102R of that
Act.
(7) Subsections (3), (4) and (5) have effect only for the purposes of
working out whether a *direct value shift has
happened and, if so, its consequences (if any) under this Division.
(1) An *equity or loan interest in the
target entity is a down interest if a decrease in its market value
is reasonably attributable to the one or more things referred to in paragraph
725-145(1)(b), and occurs at or after the time referred to in that paragraph.
The time when the decrease happens is called the decrease time for
that interest.
(2) An *equity or loan interest in the
target entity is an up interest if subsection 725-145(2) or (3) is
satisfied for the interest. The time when the interest is issued at a
*discount, or the increase in market value
happens, is called the increase time for that interest.
(1) The *direct value shift has 2
aspects.
(2) Overall, it consists of:
(a) the decreases in market value of the down interests; and
(b) the issue at a *discount of the up
interests covered by subsection 725-145(2); and
(c) the increases in market value of the up interests covered by
subsection 725-145(3).
(3) This Division also proceeds on the basis that the
*direct value shift is from each of the
*down interests to each of the
*up interests.
If it is reasonable to conclude that an increase or decrease in market
value, or the issuing of an *equity or loan
interest at a *discount, is only partly caused
by the doing of the one or more things under the
*scheme, this Division applies to the increase,
decrease, or issue at a discount, to that extent only.
General
725-205 Consequences depend on character of down interests
and up interests
725-210 Consequences for down interests depend on pre-shift
gains and losses
Special cases
725-220 Neutral direct value shifts
725-225 Issue of bonus shares or units
725-230 Off-market buy-backs
(1) The consequences for you of the
*direct value shift depend on the character of
the *down interests and
*up interests of which you are an
*affected owner.
(2) There are consequences for all your
*down interests and
*up interests in their character as
*CGT assets. However, some of them may also be
*trading stock or
*revenue assets. There are additional
consequences for those interests in their character as trading stock or revenue
assets.
Note: For example, you may own a down interest that is a CGT
asset and a revenue asset.
Sections 725-240 to 725-255 set out the consequences
for you of a shift in value from that interest in its character as a CGT asset.
The cost base of the asset will be decreased, which will affect the calculation
of a capital gain when a CGT event happens to the interest.
Section 725-320 sets out the consequences for you of a
shift in value from that interest in its character as a revenue asset. The
adjustment made under that section will affect the calculation of any profit on
the sale of the interest.
Any overlap between the capital gain and the profit
realised on the sale of the interest is then dealt with under
section 118-20.
In some instances, the direct value shift may result in a
taxing event generating a gain for you in the income year in which the shift
happens. That gain will be both a capital gain (because the down interest can be
characterised as a CGT asset) and an increase in your assessable income (because
the down interest can be characterised as a revenue asset). Again, any overlap
is dealt with under section 118-20.
(1) The consequences for a *down interest
also depend on whether it has a *pre-shift gain
or a *pre-shift loss.
(2) It has a pre-shift gain if, immediately
before the *decrease time, its market value was
greater than its *adjustable
value.
(3) It has a pre-shift loss if, immediately
before the *decrease time, its market value was
equal to or less than its *adjustable
value.
[The next section is section 725-220.]
(1) The consequences are different if the total decrease in market value
of your *down interests is equal to the sum
of:
(a) the total increase in market value of your
*up interests; and
(b) the total *discounts given to
you on the issue of your up interests.
(2) In that case, this Subdivision and Subdivisions 725-D to 725-F
apply to you as if the *direct value
shift:
(a) consisted only of:
(i) the decreases in market value of your
*down interests; and
(ii) the issue at a *discount of your
*up interests covered by subsection 725-145(2);
and
(iii) the increases in market value of your up interests covered by
subsection 725-145(3); and
(b) were from each of your down interests to each of your up
interests.
(3) This section has effect despite section 725-160.
(1) The consequences are different if you are an
*affected owner of
*up interests (the bonus
interests) that the target entity issues to you, at a
*discount, under the
*scheme, in relation to
*down interests (the original
interests) of which you are an affected owner.
Effect of treatment under subsection 130-20(3)
(2) To the extent that the *direct value
shift is to the bonus interests from original interests in
relation to which the target entity issued bonus interests to which:
(a) subsection 130-20(3) applies (because none of them is a dividend or
otherwise assessable income); and
(b) item 1 of the table in that subsection applies (because the
original interests are post-CGT assets);
these paragraphs apply:
(c) the respective *cost bases and
*reduced cost bases of those original interests
are not reduced;
(d) the bonus interests referred to in subsection (1) do not give
rise to a *taxing event generating a gain for
you under the table in section 725-245 on any of those original
interests.
(3) To the extent that the *direct value
shift is from the original interests to bonus interests to which
subsection 130-20(3) applies (because none of them is a dividend or otherwise
assessable income) and:
(a) item 1 of the table in that subsection applies (because the
original interests are post-CGT assets); or
(b) item 2 of that table applies (because the original interests are
pre-CGT assets and an amount has been paid for the bonus interests that you were
required to pay);
the respective *cost bases and
*reduced cost bases of those bonus interests
are not uplifted.
Effect of treatment under subsection 6BA(3) of the Income Tax Assessment
Act 1936
(4) To the extent that the *direct value
shift is to the bonus interests from original interests in
relation to which the target entity issued bonus interests to which subsection
6BA(3) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies (either because they
are shares issued for no consideration and none of them is a dividend or because
they qualify for the intercorporate dividend rebate):
(a) the respective *adjustable values of
those original interests, in their character as
*trading stock or
*revenue assets, are not reduced; and
(b) the bonus interests referred to in subsection (1) do not give
rise to a *taxing event generating a gain for
you under the table in section 725-335 on any of those original
interests.
(5) To the extent that the *direct value
shift is from the original interests to bonus interests to which
subsection 6BA(3) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies, the
respective *adjustable values of those bonus
interests of which you are an affected owner, in their character as trading
stock or revenue assets, are not uplifted.
(1) The consequences are different if:
(a) a decrease in the market value of a
*down interest of which you are an
*affected owner is reasonably attributable to
the target entity proposing to buy back that interest for less than its market
value; and
(b) the target entity does buy back that down interest; and
(c) subsection 159GZZZQ(2) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936
treats you as having received the down interest’s market value worked
out as if the buy-back had not occurred and was never proposed to
occur.
(2) The *adjustable value of the
*down interest is not reduced, and there is no
*taxing event generating a gain.
Note: The down interest is not dealt with here because it is
already dealt with in Division 16K of Part III of the Income Tax
Assessment Act 1936.
(3) Also, to the extent that the *direct
value shift is from the *down interest to
*up interests of which you are an
*affected owner, uplifts in the
*adjustable value of the up interests are
worked out under either or both of:
(a) item 8 of the table in subsection 725-250(2); and
(b) item 9 of the table in subsection 725-335(3);
as if the down interest were one owned by another affected owner.
725-240 CGT consequences; meaning of adjustable
value
725-245 Table of taxing events generating a
gain for interests as CGT assets
725-250 Table of consequences for adjustable values of
interests as CGT assets
725-255 Multiple CGT consequences for the same down interest
or up interest
(1) The CGT consequences for you of a
*direct value shift are of one or more of these
3 kinds:
(a) there are one or more *taxing events
generating a gain for *down interests of which
you are an affected owner (see subsection (2));
(b) the *cost base and
*reduced cost base of down interests of which
you are an *affected owner are reduced (see
subsection (3));
(c) the cost base and reduced cost base of
*up interests of which you are an affected
owner are uplifted (see subsection (4)).
Note: If there is a taxing event generating a gain, CGT
event K8 happens. See section 104-240.
Taxing event generating a gain
(2) To work out:
(a) whether under the table in section 725-245 there is a
*taxing event generating a gain for you on a
*down interest; and
(b) if so, the amount of the gain;
assume that the adjustable value from time to time of that or
any other *equity or loan interest in the
*target entity is its
*cost base.
Note: For example, for that purpose the question whether the
interest has a pre-shift gain or a pre-shift loss is determined on the basis
that the interest’s adjustable value is its cost base.
Reduction or uplift of cost base and reduced cost base
(3) The *cost base and the
*reduced cost base of a
*down interest are reduced at the
*decrease time to the extent that
section 725-250 provides for the
*adjustable value of the interest to be
reduced.
(4) The *cost base and the
*reduced cost base of an
*up interest are uplifted at the
*increase time to the extent that
section 725-250 provides for the
*adjustable value of the interest to be
uplifted.
(5) However, the *cost base or
*reduced cost base is uplifted only to
the extent that the amount of the uplift is still reflected in the market value
of the interest when a later *CGT event happens
to the interest.
(6) To work out:
(a) whether the *cost base or
*reduced cost base of the interest is reduced
or uplifted; and
(b) if so, by how much;
assume that:
(c) the adjustable value from time to time of that or any
other *equity or loan interest in the
*target entity is its cost base or reduced cost
base, as appropriate; and
(d) if the interest is an *up interest
because it was issued at a *discount—the
adjustable value of the interest immediately before it was issued
was its cost base or reduced cost base, as appropriate, when it was
issued.
Note: For example, for that purpose the question whether the
interest has a pre-shift gain or a pre-shift loss is determined on the basis
that the interest’s adjustable value is its cost base or reduced cost
base, as appropriate.
Reductions and uplifts also apply to pre-CGT assets
(7) A reduction or uplift occurs regardless of whether the entity that
owns the interest *acquired it before, on or
after 20 September 1985.
To the extent that the *direct value
shift is from *down interests of which you are
an *affected owner, and that are specified in
an item in the table, to *up interests
specified in that item, those up interests give rise to a taxing event
generating a gain for you on each of those down interests. The gain is
worked out under section 725-365.
|
Taxing events generating a gain for down interests as CGT
assets |
||
|---|---|---|
|
Item |
Down interests: |
Up interests: |
|
1 |
*down interests that: |
*up interests owned by you
that: |
|
2 |
*down interests that: |
*up interests owned by you that are
your *trading stock or
*revenue assets |
|
3 |
*down interests owned by you
that: |
*up interests owned by you
that: |
|
4 |
*down interests owned by you that
have *pre-shift
gains |
up interests owned by other
*affected owners |
Note: If there is a taxing event generating a gain on a down
interest, CGT event K8 happens: see section 104-240. However, a capital
gain you make under CGT event K8 is disregarded if the down
interest:
• is your trading stock (see section 118-25);
or
• is a pre-CGT asset (see subsection
104-240(5)).
(1) The table in subsection (2) sets out consequences of the
*direct value shift for the
*adjustable values of
*down interests and
*up interests of which you are an
*affected owner, in their character as
*CGT assets.
(2) To the extent that the *direct value
shift is from *down interests specified in an
item in the table to *up interests specified in
that item:
(a) the *adjustable value of each of
those down interests is decreased by the amount worked out under the section (if
any) specified for the down interests in the last column of that item;
and
(b) the adjustable value of each of those
*up interests is uplifted by the amount worked
out under the section (if any) specified for the up interests in that
column.
|
Consequences of the direct value shift for adjustable values of CGT
assets |
|||
|---|---|---|---|
|
Item |
To the extent that the direct value shift is from: |
To: |
The decrease or uplift is worked out under: |
|
1 |
*down interests that: |
*up interests owned by you that do
not give rise to a *taxing event
generating a gain for you on those down interests under
section 725-245 |
for the down interests: section 725-365; and for the up interests: section 725-370 |
|
2 |
*down interests that: |
*up interests owned by you that are
*pre-CGT assets |
for the down interests: section 725-365; and for the up interests: section 725-370 |
|
3 |
*down interests that: |
*up interests owned by you that are
*post-CGT assets |
for the down interests: section 725-365; and for the up interests: section 725-375 |
|
4 |
*down interests owned by you that
have *pre-shift
gains |
*up interests owned by you that
give rise to a *taxing event generating a gain
on those down interests under section 725-245 |
for the down interests: section 725-365; and for the up interests: section 725-375 |
|
5 |
*down interests owned by you that
have *pre-shift losses |
*up interests owned by
you |
for the down interests: section 725-380; and for the up interests: section 725-375 |
|
6 |
*down interests owned by you that
have *pre-shift
gains |
*up interests owned by other
*affected owners |
for the down interests: section 725-365 |
|
7 |
*down interests owned by you that
have *pre-shift losses |
*up interests owned by other
*affected owners |
for the down interests: section 725-380 |
|
8 |
*down interests owned by other
*affected owners |
*up interests owned by
you |
for the up interests: section 725-375 |
|
9 |
*down interests owned by
you |
*up interests owned by entities that
are not *affected owners |
(there are no decreases or uplifts) |
|
10 |
*down interests owned by entities that
are not *affected owners |
*up interests owned by
you |
(there are no decreases or uplifts) |
(1) A *down interest or
*up interest of which you are an
*affected owner may be covered by 2 or more
items in the table in subsection 725-250(2).
(2) If the *cost base or
*reduced cost base of the same
*down interest or
*up interest is decreased or uplifted under 2
or more items, it is decreased or uplifted by the total of the amounts worked
out under those items.
(3) If for a particular *down interest
there is a *taxing event generating a gain
under an item in the table in section 725-245, that taxing event is in
addition to:
(a) each taxing event generating a gain for that interest under any other
item in that table; and
(b) each decrease in the *cost base or
*reduced cost base of the interest under an
item in the table in subsection 725-250(2).
725-310 Consequences for down interest or up interest as
trading stock
725-315 Adjustable value of trading
stock
725-320 Consequences for down interest or up interest as a
revenue asset
725-325 Adjustable value of revenue
asset
725-335 How to work out those consequences
725-340 Multiple trading stock or revenue asset consequences
for the same down interest or up interest
(1) The consequences of the *direct value
shift for your *trading stock are of one or
more of these 3 kinds:
(a) the *adjustable values of
*down interests of which you are an
*affected owner are reduced (see
subsection (2));
(b) the adjustable values of *up
interests of which you are an affected owner are uplifted (see
subsection (3));
(c) there are one or more *taxing events
generating a gain for down interests of which you are an affected owner (see
subsection (5)).
Effect of reduction or uplift of adjustable value
(2) If the *adjustable value of a
*down interest that is your trading stock is
reduced under section 725-335, you are treated as if:
(a) *immediately before the
*decrease time, you had sold the interest to
someone else (at *arm’s length and in the
ordinary course of business) for its
*adjustable value immediately before the
decrease time; and
(b) immediately after the decrease time, you had bought the interest back
for the reduced adjustable value.
(3) If the *adjustable value of an
*up interest that is your
*trading stock is uplifted under
section 725-335, you are treated as if:
(a) *immediately before the
*increase time, you had sold the interest to
someone else (at *arm’s length and in the
ordinary course of business) for its
*adjustable value immediately before the
increase time; and
(b) immediately after the increase time, you had bought the interest back
for the uplifted adjustable value.
(4) However, the increase in the cost of an
*up interest because of paragraph (3)(b)
is taken into account from time to time only to the extent that the amount of
the increase is still reflected in the market value of the interest.
Note: The situations where the increase in cost would be
taken into account include:
• in working out your deductions for the cost of
trading stock acquired during the income year in which the increase time
happens; and
• the end of an income year if the interest’s
closing value as trading stock is worked out on the basis of its cost;
and
• the start of the income year in which the interest
is disposed of, if that happens in a later income year and the interest’s
closing value as trading stock at the end of the previous income year was worked
out on the basis of its cost.
If the interest stops being trading stock,
section 70-110 treats you as having disposed of it.
Taxing event generating a gain
(5) For each *taxing event generating a
gain under an item in the table in subsection 725-335(3), the gain is included
in your assessable income for the income year in which the
*decrease time happens.
If a *down interest or
*up interest is your trading stock, its
adjustable value at a particular time is:
(a) if the interest has been *trading
stock of yours ever since the start of the income year in which that time
occurs—its *value as trading stock at the
start of the income year; or
(b) otherwise—its cost.
Note 1: If an interest has been affected by an earlier
direct value shift during the same income year, it will be treated as having
already been sold and repurchased (because of an earlier application of
section 725-310). As a result, the cost on repurchase becomes its
adjustable value immediately before the decrease time or increase time for the
later direct value shift.
Note 2: The adjustable value of an interest that is an up
interest because it was issued at a discount is worked out under
paragraph (b).
(1) The consequences of the *direct value
shift for your *revenue assets are of one or
more of these 3 kinds:
(a) the *adjustable values of
*down interests of which you are an
*affected owner are reduced (see
subsection (2));
(b) the adjustable values of *up
interests of which you are an affected owner are uplifted (see
subsection (3));
(c) one or more *taxing events generating
a gain for down interests of which you are an affected owner (see
subsection (5)).
Effect of reduction or uplift of adjustable value
(2) If the *adjustable value of a
*down interest that is your
*revenue asset is decreased under
section 725-335, you are treated as if:
(a) *immediately before the
*decrease time, you had sold the interest to
someone else for its *adjustable value
immediately before the decrease time; and
(b) immediately afterwards, you had bought the interest back for the
reduced adjustable value; and
(c) from the time when you bought it back, the interest continued to be a
revenue asset, for the same reasons as it was a revenue asset before you sold
it.
(3) If the *adjustable value of an
*up interest that is your
*revenue asset is uplifted under
section 725-335, you are treated as if:
(a) *immediately before the
*increase time, you had sold the interest to
someone else for its *adjustable value
immediately before the increase time; and
(b) immediately afterwards, you had bought the interest back for the
uplifted adjustable value; and
(c) from the time when you bought it back, the interest continued to be a
revenue asset, for the same reasons as it was a revenue asset before you sold
it.
(4) However, the uplift in *adjustable
value is taken into account only to the extent that the amount of the uplift is
still reflected in the market value of the interest when it is disposed of or
otherwise realised.
Taxing event generating a gain
(5) For each *taxing event generating a
gain under an item in the table in subsection 725-335(3), the gain is included
in your assessable income for the income year in which the
*decrease time happens.
(1) If a *down interest is your
*revenue asset, its adjustable
value immediately before the *decrease
time is the total of the amounts that would be subtracted from the gross
disposal proceeds in calculating any profit or loss on disposal of the interest
if you disposed of it immediately before the decrease time.
(2) If an *up interest is your
*revenue asset and it increases in market value
because of the *direct value shift, its
adjustable value immediately before the
*increase time is the total of the amounts that
would be subtracted from the gross disposal proceeds in calculating any profit
or loss on disposal of the interest if you disposed of it immediately before the
increase time.
(3) If an *up interest is your
*revenue asset and it is issued at a
*discount, it is taken to have an
adjustable value immediately before it is issued equal to the
consideration paid or given by you for the interest.
Note: If an interest has been affected by an earlier direct
value shift during the same income year, it will be treated as having already
been sold and repurchased (because of an earlier application of
section 725-320). As a result, the cost on repurchase becomes its
adjustable value immediately before the decrease time or increase time for the
later direct value shift.
[The next section is
section 725-335.]
(1) This section sets out the consequences of the
*direct value shift for a
*down interest or
*up interest as
*trading stock or a
*revenue asset.
(2) If you have both trading stock and revenue assets, items 1 and 2
of the table in subsection (3) can apply once to the trading stock and
again to the revenue assets. The other items apply (if at all) to the trading
stock and revenue assets together.
Decreases and uplifts in adjustable value
(3) To the extent that the *direct value
shift is from *down interests specified in an
item in the table to *up interests specified in
that item:
(a) the *adjustable value of each of
those down interests is decreased by the amount worked out under the section (if
any) specified for the down interests in the last column of that item;
and
(b) the adjustable value of each of those
*up interests is uplifted by the amount worked
out under the section (if any) specified for the up interests in that
column.
|
Consequences for down interest or up interest as trading stock or
revenue asset |
|||
|---|---|---|---|
|
Item |
To the extent that the direct value shift is from: |
To: |
The decrease or uplift is worked out under: |
|
1 |
*down interests owned by you
that: |
*up interests owned by you that are
of that same kind |
for the down interests: section 725-365; and for the up interests: section 725-370 |
|
2 |
*down interests owned by you
that: |
*up interests owned by you that are
of the other kind (either your
*revenue assets or your
*trading stock) |
for the down interests: section 725-365; and for the up interests: section 725-375 |
|
3 |
*down interests owned by you
that: |
*up interests owned by you that are
of that same kind or of the other kind |
for the down interests: section 725-380; and for the up interests: section 725-375 |
|
4 |
*down interests owned by you
that: |
*up interests owned by you that are
neither your *revenue assets nor your
*trading stock |
for the down interests: section 725-365 |
|
5 |
*down interests owned by you
that: |
*up interests owned by you that are
neither your *revenue assets nor your
*trading stock |
for the down interests: section 725-380 |
|
6 |
*down interests owned by you
that are neither your *revenue
assets nor your *trading
stock |
*up interests owned by you that are
your *trading stock or
*revenue assets |
for the up interests: section 725-375 |
|
7 |
*down interests owned by you
that: |
up interests owned by other
*affected owners |
for the down interests: section 725-365 |
|
8 |
*down interests owned by you
that: |
*up interests owned by other
*affected owners |
for the down interests: section 725-380 |
|
9 |
*down interests owned by other
*affected owners |
*up interests owned by you
that are your *trading stock or
*revenue assets |
for the up interests: section 725-375 |
|
10 |
*down interests owned by you
that are your *trading stock or
*revenue assets |
*up interests owned by entities that
are not *affected owners |
(there are no decreases or uplifts) |
|
11 |
*down interests owned by entities that
are not *affected owners |
*up interests owned by you
that are your *trading stock or
*revenue assets |
(there are no decreases or uplifts) |
Taxing events generating a gain
(4) To the extent that the *direct value
shift is from *down interests:
(a) of which you are an *affected owner;
and
(b) that are specified in item 2, 4 or 7 in the table in
subsection (3);
to *up interests specified in that item,
those up interests give rise to a taxing event generating a gain
for you under that item on each of those down interests. The gain is worked out
under section 725-365.
(1) A *down interest or
*up interest of which you are an
*affected owner may be covered by 2 or more
items in the table in subsection 725-335(3).
(2) If the *adjustable value of the same
*down interest or
*up interest is decreased or uplifted under 2
or more items, it is decreased or uplifted by the total of the amounts worked
out under those items.
(3) If for a particular *down interest
there is a *taxing event generating a gain
under an item, that taxing event is in addition to:
(a) each taxing event generating a gain for that interest under any other
item in the table; and
(b) each decrease in the *adjustable
value of the interest under that or any other item in the table.
725-365 Decreases in adjustable values of down interests
(with pre-shift gains), and taxing events generating a gain
725-370 Uplifts in adjustable values of up interests under
certain table items
725-375 Uplifts in adjustable values of up interests under
other table items
725-380 Decreases in adjustable value of down interests
(with pre-shift losses)
Use the following method statement:
(a) to work out the amount of the gain for a
*taxing event generating a gain
under:
(i) section 725-245; or
(ii) item 2, 4 or 7 of the table in subsection 725-335(3);
and
(b) to work out the decrease in
*adjustable value of a
*down interest under:
(i) item 1, 2, 3, 4 or 6 of the table in subsection 725-250(2);
or
(ii) item 1, 2, 4 or 7 of the table in subsection
725-335(3).
Method statement
Step 1. Group together all *down
interests that:
(a) are of the kind referred to in the relevant item; and
(b) immediately before the *decrease
time, had the same *adjustable value as the
down interest; and
(c) immediately before that time had the same market value as the down
interest; and
(d) sustained the same decrease in market value as the down interest
because of the *direct value shift.
Step 2. Work out the value shifted from that group of
*down interests to the
*up interests referred to in the relevant item
using the following formula:

Step 3. Work out the notional adjustable value of the value shifted
from that group of *down interests to those
*up interests using the formula:

Step 4. The decrease in the
*adjustable value of the
*down interest under the relevant item is equal
to:

Step 5. For a *taxing event
generating a gain under the relevant item, the amount of the gain
is equal to:
![]()
Use the following method statement to work out the uplift in
*adjustable value of an
*up interest under:
(a) item 1 or 2 of the table in subsection 725-250(2); or
(b) item 1 of the table in subsection 725-335(3).
Method statement
Step 1. If the market value of the
*up interest increases because of the
*direct value shift, group together all up
interests of the kind referred to in the relevant item that:
(a) immediately before the *increase
time, had the same *adjustable value as the up
interest; and
(b) sustained the same increase in market value as the up interest because
of the *direct value shift.
If the *up interest is issued at a
*discount, group together all
*up interests of the kind referred to in the
relevant item that:
(c) immediately before the *increase
time, had the same *adjustable value as the up
interest; and
(d) because of the direct value shift, are issued at the same discount as
the up interest.
Step 2. The notional adjustable value of the value shifted from the
*down interests referred to in the relevant
item to all the *up interests referred to in
that item has already been worked out under one or more applications of step 3
of the method statement in section 725-365.
Step 3. Use the following formula to work out how much of that
notional adjustable value is attributable to the value shifted to the group of
*up interests referred to in step 1 of this
method statement:

Step 4. The uplift in the
*adjustable value of the
*up interest under the relevant item is equal
to:

Use the following method statement to work out the uplift in
*adjustable value of an
*up interest under:
(a) item 3, 4, 5 or 8 of the table in subsection 725-250(2);
or
(b) item 2, 3, 6 or 9 of the table in subsection
725-335(3).
Method statement
Step 1. If the market value of the
*up interest increases because of the direct
value shift, group together all *up interests
of the kind referred to in the relevant item that sustained the same increase in
market value as the up interest because of the direct value shift.
If the up interest is issued at a discount, group together all up
interests of the kind referred to in the relevant item that are issued at a
discount of the same amount as the up interest because of the direct value
shift.
Step 2. The value shifted to that group of
*up interests from the
*down interests referred to in the relevant
item is the amount worked out using the formula:

where:
sum of the group increases or discounts means (as
appropriate):
(a) the sum of the increases in market value of all
*up interests in the group because of the
*direct value shift; or
(b) the sum of the *discounts at which
all *up interests in the group were issued
because of the *direct value shift.
total value of the direct value shift means:
(a) if the sum of the decreases in market value of all
*down interests because of the
*direct value shift is equal to or greater than
the sum of the increases in market value of all
*up interests and all
*discounts given because of the shift—the
sum of the decreases; or
(b) if the sum of the decreases in market value of all down interests
because of the direct value shift is less than the sum of the increases in
market value of all up interests and all discounts given because of the
shift—the sum of the increases and discounts.
Step 3. The uplift in the
*adjustable value of the
*up interest under the relevant item is equal
to:

Use the following method statement to work out the decrease in
*adjustable value of a
*down interest under:
(a) item 5 or 7 of the table in subsection 725-250(2); or
(b) item 3, 5 or 8 of the table in subsection 725-335(3).
Method statement
Step 1. Group together all *down
interests of the kind referred to in the relevant item that:
(a) immediately before the *decrease
time, had the same *adjustable value as the
down interest; and
(b) immediately before that time had the same market value as the down
interest; and
(c) sustained the same decrease in market value as the down interest
because of the *direct value shift.
Step 2. Work out the value shifted from that group of
*down interests to the
*up interests referred to in the relevant item
using the formula:

Step 3. The decrease in *adjustable
value of the *down interest under the relevant
item is equal to:

Table of Subdivisions
Guide to Division 727
727-A Scope of the indirect value shifting rules
727-B What is an indirect value shift
727-C Exclusions
727-D Working out the market value of economic benefits
727-E Key concepts
727-F Consequences of an indirect value shift
727-G The realisation time method
727-H The adjustable value method
727-K Reduction of loss on equity or loan interests realised before the IVS
time
727-L Indirect value shift resulting from a direct value shift
If there is a net shift of value between 2 related entities because of a
non-arm’s length dealing, this Division:
(a) prevents losses from arising, because of the value shift, on
realisation of direct or indirect equity or loan interests in the losing entity;
and
(b) within limits, prevents gains from arising, because of the value
shift, on realisation of direct or indirect equity or loan interests in the
gaining entity.
However, it does so only for interests that are owned by entities involved
in the value shift.
Table of sections
727-5 What is an indirect
value shift?
727-10 How does this Division deal with indirect value
shifts?
727-15 When does an indirect value shift have consequences
under this Division?
727-25 Effect of this Division on realisations at a loss
that occur before the nature or extent of an indirect value shift can be fully
determined
(1) An indirect value shift arises when there is a net shift of value from
one entity to another.
Example: Company A transfers property to company B in return
for a cash payment. If the market value of the property is $180 million but the
cash payment is only $50 million, there is a net shift of value from company A
to company B of $130 million.
(2) It is called indirect because the transaction will have the
indirect effect of shifting value from equity or loan interests in the losing
entity to equity or loan interests in the gaining entity.
This is because the net shift in value between the entities will usually
decrease the market value of interests in the losing entity and
increase the market value of interests in the gaining entity.
Example: Assume that company C owns all the shares in
company A and company D owns all the shares in company B. The net shift of value
from company A to company B will reduce the value of company C’s shares in
company A and increase the value of company D’s shares in company
B.
(3) It will also produce corresponding effects further up a chain of
entities.
Example: Assume that company E owns all the shares in
company C and company D. The net shift of value from company A to company B will
also reduce the value of company E’s shares in company C and increase the
value of its shares in company D.
(4) This Division is not concerned with the tax treatment of the
net shift in value between the entities at the bottom of the chains. Instead, it
deals with the effects on the market value of interests (both direct and
indirect) in those entities.
(5) An indirect value shift distorts the relationship between the market
value of an equity or loan interest and its value for income tax purposes. When
the interest is realised, this can produce an inappropriate loss for income tax
purposes, or an inappropriate gain.
Example: If company E sold its shares in company C, the
indirect value shift could (apart from this Division) result in a loss for
income tax purposes. Company E could defer the corresponding gain on its shares
in company D by not selling these.
(1) To prevent an inappropriate loss or gain from arising on realisation
of an interest, this Division reduces the amount of the loss or gain
(realisation time method). However, a choice can be made to adjust the
interest’s value for income tax purposes in a way that takes account of
the indirect value shift (adjustable value method).
(2) This Division does not create taxing events giving rise to
gains or losses.
(1) Indirect value shift is defined very broadly, but the application of
this Division is limited in various ways.
(2) The losing entity must be a company or trust (except a superannuation
entity). However, the gaining entity can be any kind of entity, including an
individual.
(3) This Division does not apply if entities deal with each other
at arm’s length, or provide economic benefits in return for full market
value.
(4) The losing entity and the gaining entity must be connected by having
had the same ultimate controller. In the case of closely held entities,
they may instead be connected by having had a high level of common
ownership.
(5) The only interests affected are those owned by entities involved in
the indirect value shift or by their associates.
(6) There are a range of exclusions, such as:
(a) exclusions for minor indirect value shifts; and
(b) a series of rules designed to provide safe harbour treatment for
common transactions relating to services; and
(c) anti-overlap provisions to prevent double-counting.
(7) Rules of thumb are included to make it easier to determine the market
value of some kinds of economic benefits.
(8) To reduce compliance costs for:
(a) entities in the Simplified Tax System; and
(b) entities that meet the CGT small business net asset threshold ($5
million);
interests owned by those entities are not affected by this
Division.
[The next section is section 727-25.]
(1) To determine whether a scheme gives rise to an indirect value shift,
it must be possible to identify all the economic benefits under the scheme, and
the providers and recipients of those benefits.
(2) Before then, interests that might be affected by the scheme may be
realised at a loss. Subdivision 727-K contains special rules that apply if
that happens.
727-100 When an indirect value shift has consequences under
this Division
727-105 Ultimate controller test
727-110 Common-ownership nexus test (if both losing and
gaining entities are closely held)
727-125 No consequences if losing entity is a superannuation
entity
The main object of this Division is:
(a) to prevent inappropriate losses from arising on the realisation of
direct or indirect equity or loan interests in an entity from which there has
been a net shift of value because of a non-arm’s length dealing;
and
(b) to prevent inappropriate gains from arising on the realisation of
direct or indirect equity interests in the entity to which that value has been
shifted;
in cases where the 2 entities are related as set out in this
Division.
An *indirect value shift (see
Subdivision 727-B) has consequences under this Division if, and only
if:
(a) the *losing entity is at the time of
the indirect value shift a company or trust (except one listed in
section 727-125 (about superannuation entities)); and
(b) in relation to either or both of the following:
(i) the losing entity *providing one or
more economic benefits to the gaining entity
*in connection with the
*scheme from which the indirect value shift
results;
(ii) the gaining entity providing one or more economic benefits to the
losing entity in connection with the scheme;
the 2 entities are not dealing with each other at
*arm’s length; and
(c) either or both of sections 727-105 and 727-110 are satisfied;
and
(d) no exclusion in Subdivision 727-C applies.
Note 1: The consequences for direct and indirect interests
in the losing entity or in the gaining entity are set out in
Subdivision 727-F. If those consequences are to be worked out using the
realisation time method (under Subdivision 727-G), there are further
exclusions for certain 95% services indirect value shifts: see
section 727-700.
Note 2: An indirect value shift does not have consequences
for interests in the losing entity or gaining entity owned immediately before
the IVS time by an entity that:
• is eligible to be an STS taxpayer for each income
year that includes any of the IVS period; or
• would satisfy the maximum net asset value test in
section 152-15 throughout the IVS period.
See subsection 727-470(2).
It must be the case that, at some time during the
*IVS period:
(a) the *losing entity and the
*gaining entity have the same
*ultimate controller; or
(b) the ultimate controller of the losing entity is the same entity that
was the ultimate controller of the gaining entity at a different time during
that period; or
(c) the gaining entity is the ultimate controller of the losing entity;
or
(d) the losing entity is the ultimate controller of the gaining
entity.
(1) Or, it must be the case that:
(a) at some time during the *IVS period,
neither the *losing entity nor the
*gaining entity has 300 or more members (in the
case of a company) or 300 or more beneficiaries (in the case of a trust);
and
(b) the losing entity and the gaining entity have a
*common-ownership nexus within the IVS
period.
(2) Section 124-810 (under which certain companies and trusts are not
regarded as having 300 or more members or beneficiaries) also applies for the
purposes of this Division.
(3) In addition, this Division applies to a
*non-fixed trust as if it did not have 300 or
more beneficiaries.
An *indirect value shift has no
consequences under this Division if the *losing
entity is one of these in relation to the income year in which the indirect
value shift happens:
(a) a *complying superannuation fund;
or
(b) a *non-complying superannuation fund;
or
(c) a *complying approved deposit fund;
or
(d) a *non-complying approved deposit
fund; or
(e) a *pooled superannuation
trust.
727-150 How to determine whether a scheme results in an
indirect value shift
727-155 Providing economic benefits
727-160 When an economic benefit is provided in
connection with a scheme
727-165 Preventing double-counting of economic
benefits
(1) A *scheme can result in one or more
*indirect value shifts only if one or more
economic benefits have been, are being, or are to be,
*provided *in
connection with the scheme.
(2) The question whether the *scheme has
that result must be determined by reference to the facts and circumstances that
exist at the earliest time (either when the scheme is entered into or later)
when it is reasonable to conclude that:
(a) all the economic benefits that have been, are being, or are to be,
*provided *in
connection with the scheme can be identified; and
(b) for each of those economic benefits:
(i) the entity that has provided, is providing, or
is to provide, the economic benefit can be identified; and
(ii) the entity to which the economic benefit has been, is being, or is to
be, provided can be identified; and
(iii) if the economic benefit is to be provided—those entities are
in existence, and the providing of the economic benefit is not contingent;
and
(c) there are no other economic benefits that are to be provided in
connection with the scheme if some contingency is met.
That time is called the IVS time for the scheme.
Note: In most cases, the IVS time will be at or soon after
the scheme is entered into. However, if:
• direct or indirect interests in a company or trust
are realised at a loss when the IVS time for the scheme has not yet
happened (even if it never happens); and
• the company or trust has provided, is providing, is
to provide, or might provide, economic benefits in connection with the
scheme;
there may be consequences for those interests similar to
those of an indirect value shift resulting from the scheme. See
Subdivision 727-K.
(3) The *scheme results in an
indirect value shift from one entity (the losing
entity) to another entity (the gaining entity) if the
total market value of the one or more economic benefits (the greater
benefits) that the losing entity has
*provided, is providing, or is to provide, to
the gaining entity *in connection with the
scheme exceeds:
(a) the total market value of the one or more economic benefits
(lesser benefits) that the gaining entity has provided, is
providing, or is to provide, to the losing entity in connection with the scheme;
or
(b) if there are no economic benefits covered by
paragraph (a)—nil.
That excess is the amount of the indirect value shift.
(4) The market value of an economic benefit is to be determined as at the
earliest time when it is reasonable to conclude that:
(a) the economic benefit can be identified; and
(b) paragraph (2)(b) is satisfied for that benefit.
(5) Neither the *losing entity nor the
*gaining entity needs to be a party to the
*scheme. A benefit can be provided by act or
omission.
(6) The indirect value shift happens at the
*IVS time.
(7) The IVS period for a
*scheme starts immediately before the scheme is
entered into and ends at the *IVS
time.
(8) A contingency that is artificial, or is virtually certain to be met,
is treated under this Division as if it had been met.
Examples
(1) These are some examples of an entity providing an economic benefit to
another entity:
(a) the first entity pays an amount to the other entity (in this case the
market value of the benefit is the amount of the payment);
(b) the first entity provides an asset or services to the other
entity;
(c) the first entity does something that creates an asset in the hands of
the other entity (for example, a company issues shares to its
members);
(d) the first entity incurs a liability to the other entity, or increases
a liability it already owes to the other entity;
(e) the first entity terminates all or part of a liability owed by the
other entity;
(f) the first entity does something that increases the market value of an
asset that the other entity holds.
(2) These examples are not intended to limit the meaning of providing an
economic benefit.
Things treated as economic benefits
(3) This Division applies as if the ending of:
(a) a *primary equity interest or
*secondary equity interest in an entity;
or
(b) a right that the owner of a *primary
equity interest or *secondary equity interest
in an entity has because of owning the interest;
were an economic benefit that the owner of the interest provides to that
entity.
(1) An economic benefit has been, is being, is to be, or might be,
*provided by an entity to another entity
in connection with a *scheme if, and
only if:
(a) the benefit has been, is being, is to be, or might be, provided under
the scheme; or
(b) the providing of the benefit is reasonably attributable to:
(i) something that has been, is being, is to be, or might be, done or
omitted under the scheme (whether before, at the time of, or after, the
providing of the benefit) by an entity that is either of those entities or a
third entity; or
(ii) 2 or more such things.
(2) An entity referred to in paragraph (1)(b) need not be a party to
the *scheme. A benefit can be provided by act
or omission.
Rights to have economic benefits provided
(1) If an economic benefit that has been, is being, is to be, or might be,
*provided as mentioned in subsection 727-150(3)
or 727-855(1) consists of a right to have economic benefits provided, that
subsection applies to the right but does not also apply to those economic
benefits.
Example: Acme Ltd enters into an agreement with Paragon Pty
Ltd under which Acme is to provide services to Paragon over a 5 year period in
return for payments.
Paragon’s rights under the agreement are economic
benefits that Acme provides to Paragon when the agreement is made. The services
are economic benefits that Acme is to provide to Paragon.
Because of this subsection, the market value of the rights
is taken into account in working out whether there has been an indirect value
shift, but the market value of the services is not.
Effect of an economic benefit on interests in the entity to which it is
provided
(2) If an economic benefit has been, is being, or is to be,
*provided to an entity, then, for the purposes
of subsection 727-150(3) or 727-855(1), disregard an economic benefit to the
extent that:
(a) it consists of an increase in the market value of:
(i) an *equity or loan interest in the
entity; or
(ii) an *indirect equity or loan interest
in the entity; and
(b) the increase is reasonably attributable to the first-mentioned
benefit.
Some indirect value shifts do not have consequences under this
Division.
Note 1: If the consequences of an indirect value shift are
to be worked out using the realisation time method (under
Subdivision 727-G), there are further exclusions for certain 95% services
indirect value shifts: see section 727-700.
Note 2: For cases where there may be both a direct value
shift and an indirect value shift, see Subdivision 727-L.
Table of sections
General
727-215 Amount does not exceed $50,000
727-220 Disposal of asset at cost, or at undervalue if full
value is not reflected in adjustable values of equity or loan interests in the
losing entity
Indirect value shifts involving services
727-230 Services provided by losing entity to gaining entity
for at least their direct cost
727-235 Services provided by gaining entity to losing entity
for no more than a commercially realistic price
727-240 What services certain provisions apply
to
727-245 How to work out certain amounts for the purposes of
sections 727-230 and 727-235
Anti-overlap provisions
727-250 Distribution by an entity to a member or
beneficiary
Miscellaneous
727-260 Shift down a wholly-owned chain of
entities
[This is the end of the Guide.]
(1) An *indirect value shift does not
have consequences under this Division if the amount of it does not exceed
$50,000.
(2) However, subsection (1) does not apply to an
*indirect value shift (and is taken never to
have applied to it) if:
(a) before, at the same time as, or after it, another indirect value shift
happens for which the same entity is the losing entity as for the first indirect
value shift; and
(b) having regard to all relevant circumstances, it is reasonable to
conclude that the sole or main reason why one of the indirect value shifts
happened under a different *scheme from the
other was so that its amount would not exceed $50,000.
(1) An *indirect value shift does not
have consequences under this Division if the conditions in this section are
met.
(2) The *greater benefits must consist
entirely of:
(a) the *losing entity transferring a
*CGT asset to the
*gaining entity; or
(b) a right to have the losing entity transfer an asset to the gaining
entity.
(3) There must be *lesser benefits and,
as at the *IVS time, the total market value of
the lesser benefits must not be less than the greatest of these
amounts:
(a) the asset’s *cost base at that
time;
(b) the asset’s cost;
(c) the asset’s market value immediately before the most recent time
(if any), since the *losing entity
*acquired the asset, when an
*affected owner has acquired:
(i) a *primary equity interest in the
losing entity; or
(ii) an *indirect primary equity interest
in the losing entity.
(4) A *primary equity interest in an
entity is an indirect primary equity interest in another entity
if, and only if:
(a) the first entity owns a primary equity interest in the other entity;
or
(b) the first entity owns a primary equity interest that is an indirect
primary equity interest in the other entity because of one or more other
applications of this subsection.
[The next section is section 727-230.]
An *indirect value shift does not have
consequences under this Division if:
(a) to the extent of at least 95% of their total market value, the
*greater benefits consist entirely
of:
(i) a right to have services that are covered by section 727-240
provided directly by the losing entity to the gaining entity; or
(ii) services that are covered by section 727-240 and have been, are
being, or are to be, so provided;
or both; and
(b) there are *lesser benefits and, as at
the *IVS time, the total market value of the
lesser benefits is not less than the total of:
(i) the present value of the direct cost to the losing entity of providing
the services; and
(ii) the present value of a reasonable allocation of the total direct cost
to the losing entity of providing services that include the first-mentioned
services (so far as it is not already covered by
subparagraph (i)).
(1) An *indirect value shift does not
have consequences under this Division if:
(a) there are *lesser benefits and, to
the extent of at least 95% of their total market value, the lesser benefits
consist entirely of:
(i) a right to have services that are covered by section 727-240
provided directly by the gaining entity to the losing entity; or
(ii) services that are covered by section 727-240 and have been, are
being, or are to be, so provided;
or both; and
(b) as at the *IVS time, the total market
value of the greater benefits is not more than the total of:
(i) the present value of the direct cost to the gaining entity of
providing the services; and
(ii) the present value of a reasonable allocation of the total direct cost
to the gaining entity of providing services that include the first-mentioned
services (so far as it is not already covered by subparagraph (i));
and
(iii) the present value of a reasonable allocation of the indirect cost to
the gaining entity of providing the first-mentioned services; and
(iv) the mark-up worked out under subsection (2) or (3) of this
section.
(2) If it is reasonable to estimate that an entity providing the same
quantity of services of the same kind in the same market would charge for them
on the basis of a particular percentage mark-up, or on the basis of a percentage
mark-up within a particular range, the mark-up for the purposes of
subparagraph (1)(b)(iv) is:
• the total of the respective present values of the costs mentioned
in subparagraphs (1)(b)(i), (ii) and (iii);
multiplied by:
• that percentage mark-up, or the highest percentage in that
range.
(3) Otherwise, the mark-up for the purposes of
subparagraph (1)(b)(iv) is 10% of the total of the respective present
values of the costs mentioned in subparagraphs (1)(b)(i), (ii) and
(iii).
(1) Sections 727-230, 727-235, 727-700 and 727-725 apply only to
services consisting of:
(a) doing work (including professional work and giving professional advice
or any other kind of advice); or
Note: Examples include accounting or legal services;
advertising services and financial management services.
(b) providing (including allowing use of) facilities for entertainment,
recreation or instruction; or
(c) leasing, renting, hiring, or allowing the use of, any asset;
or
(d) packaging, transporting or storing any property; or
(e) providing insurance; or
(f) services provided, by a banker to a customer, in the course of the
banker carrying on the business of banking; or
(g) lending money or providing any other form of financial
accommodation.
(2) It does not matter whether services covered by paragraph (1)(a)
also involve supplying property.
(1) The costs mentioned in paragraph 727-230(b) or 727-235(1)(b) are to be
worked out:
(a) in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices;
and
(b) to the extent that the services are to be provided in the future, on
the basis of a reasonable estimate of those costs.
(2) To avoid doubt, the direct cost or indirect cost mentioned in
paragraph 727-230(b) or 727-235(1)(b) does not include:
(a) to the extent that the services consist of or include lending money or
providing any other form of financial accommodation—the amount of the loan
or other accommodation; or
(b) to the extent that the services consist of or include leasing,
renting, hiring, or allowing the use of, any asset:
(i) the cost of acquiring the asset; or
(ii) the cost of acquiring an interest in, or right in respect of, the
asset in order to provide the services.
Example: Acme Ltd is the holding company of Group Financier
Pty Ltd. Group Financier Pty Ltd borrows $20 million at 7% per annum, and on
lends it to other subsidiaries of Acme Ltd at 8% per annum.
The $20 million does not form part of Group Financier Pty
Ltd’s direct cost of the services it provides to the other subsidiaries in
the form of the on lending. However, the 7% interest that Group Financier Pty
Ltd pays on the $20 million does form part of that direct cost.
(3) The present values mentioned in paragraph 727-230(b) or 727-235(1)(b)
are to be worked out using a discount rate equal to the rate that, for the
purposes of section 109N of Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, is the
benchmark interest rate for the income year in which the
*IVS time occurs.
Note: That section is about distributions to entities
connected with a private company.
(1) An *indirect value shift does not
have consequences under this Division if:
(a) the *greater benefits consist
entirely of:
(i) a distribution of income or capital that the
*losing entity makes to the
*gaining entity; or
(ii) a right to a distribution of income or capital that the losing entity
is to make to the gaining entity;
because the gaining entity holds
*primary equity interests in the losing entity;
and
(b) either:
(i) an amount covered by one or more of subsections (2), (3) and (4);
or
(ii) the total of 2 or more such amounts;
equals or exceeds the amount of the distribution.
Conditions
(2) This subsection covers an amount that the assessable income or exempt
income of the gaining entity for any income year includes because of the
distribution or right.
(3) This subsection covers an amount by which the
*cost base or
*reduced cost base (or both) of some or all of
the *primary equity interests referred to in
subsection (1) changes because of the distribution or right.
(4) This subsection covers an amount that, because of the distribution or
right, is taken into account:
(a) under section 116-20 in working out the
*capital proceeds of a
*CGT event that happens during any income year
to some or all of the *primary equity interests
referred to in subsection (1); or
(b) in working out a *capital gain that
an entity makes from CGT event E4 or G1 happening during any income year to some
or all of those primary equity interests; or
(c) in working out whether a loss or gain is
*realised for income tax purposes by a
*realisation event that happens to some or all
of those primary equity interests (in their character as
*trading stock or
*revenue assets).
Application of section to deemed dividend
(5) If a *corporate tax entity makes a
*distribution that is not otherwise a
distribution of income or capital, this section applies as if the distribution
were a distribution of income or capital the entity made.
Note: Subsection (5) extends this section to cover
something that is taken to be a dividend paid by a company. Compare item 1
of the table in subsection 960-120(1).
[The next section is section 727-260.]
(1) An *indirect value shift does not
have consequences under this Division if the
*gaining entity is a
*wholly-owned subsidiary of the
*losing entity throughout the
*IVS period.
Exception: impact on market value of primary loan interest
(2) However, subsection (1) does not apply if the
*indirect value shift has produced a
*disaggregated attributable decrease, in the
market value of an *affected interest in the
*losing entity that is also a
*primary loan interest in an entity covered by
subsection (3), for the owner of the interest.
(3) This subsection covers:
(a) the *losing entity; and
(b) an entity that owns *primary equity
interests in an entity that this subsection covers because of one or more
previous applications of it.
727-300 What the rules in this Subdivision are
for
727-315 Transfer, for its adjustable value, of depreciating
asset acquired for less than $1,500,000
This Subdivision is used in determining whether there has been an
*indirect value shift and, if so:
(a) whether it has consequences under this Division; and
(b) if it does, the amount of it.
[The next section is section 727-315.]
(1) This Division applies to an economic benefit consisting of:
(a) an entity transferring to another entity a
*depreciating asset (except a building or
structure) for which the transferring entity has deducted or can deduct an
amount under Division 40; or
(b) a right to have an entity transfer such a depreciating asset to
another entity;
as if the economic benefit’s market value were equal to the greater
(the residual value) of:
(c) the asset’s *adjustable value
at the time when the economic benefit was or is
*provided; and
(d) the value assigned to the asset at that time in the transferring
entity’s books;
but only if:
(e) as at that time, the *cost of the
unit to the transferring entity is less than $1,500,000; and
(f) it is reasonable for the transferring entity to conclude that the
unit’s actual market value at that time was, is, or will be, not less than
80%, and not more than 120%, of the residual value; and
(g) both the transferring entity and the other entity choose to have the
market value of that economic benefit treated as being equal to the residual
value.
(2) If:
(a) each of 2 or more economic benefits of the kind mentioned in
subsection (1) has been, is being, is to be, or might be, provided by the
same transferring entity, to the same other entity,
*in connection with the same
*scheme; and
(b) it is reasonable for the transferring entity to conclude that the
total of the *depreciating assets’ actual
market values at the respective times when the economic benefits were or are
*provided was, is, or will be, not less than
80%, and not more than 120%, of the total of their respective residual values
under subsection (1);
paragraph (1)(f) is taken to be satisfied for each of the economic
benefits.
Ultimate controller
727-350 Ultimate controller
727-355 Control (for value shifting purposes)
of a company
727-360 Control (for value shifting purposes)
of a fixed trust
727-365 Control (for value shifting purposes)
of a non-fixed trust
727-370 Preventing double counting for percentage stake
tests
727-375 Tests in this Subdivision are
exhaustive
Common-ownership nexus and ultimate stake of a particular
percentage
727-400 When 2 entities have a common-ownership nexus within
a period
727-405 Ultimate stake of a particular
percentage in a company
727-410 Ultimate stake of a particular
percentage in a fixed trust
727-415 Rules for tracing
An entity is an ultimate controller of another entity if,
and only if:
(a) the first entity *controls (for value
shifting purposes) the other entity; and
(b) there is no entity that controls (for value shifting purposes) both
the first entity and the other entity.
50% stake test
(1) An entity controls (for value shifting purposes) a
company if the entity, or the entity and its
*associates between them:
(a) can exercise, or can control the exercise of, at least 50% of the
voting power in the company (either directly, or indirectly through one or more
interposed entities); or
(b) have the right to receive (either directly, or indirectly through one
or more interposed entities) at least 50% of any dividends that the company may
pay; or
(c) have the right to receive for (either directly, or indirectly through
one or more interposed entities) at least 50% of any distribution of capital of
the company.
40% stake test
(2) An entity also controls (for value shifting purposes) a
company if the entity, or the entity and its
*associates between them:
(a) can exercise, or can control the exercise of, at least 40% of the
voting power in the company (either directly, or indirectly through one or more
interposed entities); or
(b) have the right to receive (either directly, or indirectly through one
or more interposed entities) at least 40% of any dividends that the company may
pay; or
(c) have the right to receive (either directly, or indirectly through one
or more interposed entities) at least 40% of any distribution of capital of the
company;
unless an entity (other than the first entity and its associates) either
alone or together with its associates in fact controls the company.
Actual control test
(3) An entity also controls (for value shifting purposes) a
company if the entity, either alone or together with its
*associates, in fact controls the
company.
40% stake test
(1) An entity controls (for value shifting purposes) a
*fixed trust if the entity, or the entity and
its *associates between them, have the right to
receive (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities)
at least 40% of any distribution of trust income, or trust capital, to
beneficiaries of the trust.
Other tests
(2) An entity also controls (for value shifting purposes) a
*fixed trust if:
(a) the entity, or an *associate of the
entity, whether alone or with other associates (the relevant
entity), has the power to obtain the beneficial enjoyment of the
trust’s capital or income (whether or not by exercising its power of
appointment or revocation, and whether with or without another entity’s
consent); or
(b) the relevant entity is able to control the application of the
trust’s capital or income in any manner (whether directly or indirectly);
or
(c) the relevant entity is able to do a thing mentioned in
paragraph (a) or (b) under a *scheme;
or
(d) a trustee of the trust is accustomed or is under an obligation
(whether formally or informally), or might reasonably be expected, to act in
accordance with the relevant entity’s directions, instructions or wishes;
or
(e) the relevant entity is able to remove or appoint a trustee of the
trust.
Trustee tests
(1) An entity controls (for value shifting purposes) a
*non-fixed trust if:
(a) the entity or an *associate of the
entity is a trustee of the trust; or
(b) the entity, or the entity and its
*associates between them, can remove or appoint
the trustee, or one or more of the trustees, of the trust; or
(c) a trustee of the trust is accustomed to act, is under an obligation
(whether formally or informally) to act, or might reasonably be expected to act,
in accordance with the directions, instructions or wishes of:
(i) the entity or an *associate of the
entity; or
(ii) 2 or more entities, at least one of which is the entity or an
associate of the entity.
Tests based on control of the trust income or capital
(2) An entity also controls (for value shifting purposes) a
*non-fixed trust if the entity, or the entity
and its *associates between them:
(a) have the power to obtain the beneficial enjoyment of trust income or
capital; or
(b) can control in any way at all, whether directly or indirectly, the
application of trust income or capital; or
(c) can, under a *scheme, gain the
enjoyment or control referred to in paragraph (a) or (b).
(3) An entity also controls (for value shifting purposes) a
*non-fixed trust if:
(a) the entity, or any of its
*associates, can benefit under the trust
otherwise than because of a *fixed entitlement
to a share of the income or capital of the trust; or
(b) if the entity, or the entity and its
*associates between them, have the right to
receive (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities)
at least 40% of any distribution of trust income, or trust capital.
If an interest giving an entity, or an entity and its
*associates:
(a) the ability to exercise, or control the exercise of, any of the voting
power in a company; or
(b) the right to receive dividends that a company may pay; or
(c) the right to receive a distribution of capital of a company;
or
(d) the right to receive a distribution of trust income or trust
capital;
is both direct and indirect, and (apart from this section) would be counted
more than once in applying subsection 727-355(1) or (2) or section 727-360,
only the direct interest is to be counted.
An entity does not control (for value shifting purposes) a
company or trust except as provided in this Subdivision.
(1) 2 entities have a common-ownership nexus within a period
if, and only if, they satisfy the test in any of the one or more items in the
table applicable to them.
|
Common-ownership nexus within a period |
||
|---|---|---|
|
Item |
If the entities are: |
This is the test: |
|
1 |
both companies |
There must be 2 or more *ultimate owners
who: Also, subsection (2) of this section must be satisfied |
|
2 |
both *fixed trusts |
There must be 2 or more *ultimate owners
who: Also, subsection (2) of this section must be satisfied |
|
3 |
a company and a *fixed trust |
There must be 2 or more *ultimate owners
who: Also, subsection (2) of this section must be satisfied |
|
4 |
a company and a *non-fixed trust |
There must be 2 or more *ultimate
owners: |
|
5 |
a *fixed trust and a
*non-fixed trust |
There must be 2 or more *ultimate
owners: |
Additional condition about profile of percentage ultimate stakes held by
2 or more ultimate owners
(2) In order to satisfy the test in item 1, 2 or 3 in the table in
subsection (1), at least one of subsections (3), (4) and (5) must be
satisfied.
(3) For at least one of the *ultimate
owners referred to in that item, the percentage of the
*ultimate stake that owner has as mentioned in
paragraph (a) in the last column of that item must be at least 40%, and so
must the percentage of the ultimate stake that owner has as mentioned in
paragraph (b) in the last column of that item.
(4) Alternatively, for each of those
*ultimate owners, the percentage of the
*ultimate stake that owner has as mentioned in
that paragraph (a) must be the same as the percentage of the ultimate stake
that owner has as mentioned in that paragraph (b).
(5) Alternatively, the number of those
*ultimate owners must not exceed 16.
(1) This section sets out 3 tests of whether an entity has an
ultimate stake of a particular percentage (the test
percentage) in a company.
Note: In applying the tests, follow the rules in
section 727-415.
Voting power
(2) The first test is that, after tracing, to the
*ultimate owners who ultimately hold it, the
direct and indirect ownership of all *shares in
the company that carry the right to exercise voting power in the company, that
ownership is held by the entity to the extent of the test percentage of that
voting power.
Dividends
(3) The second test is that, after tracing, to the
*ultimate owners who ultimately hold it, the
direct and indirect ownership of all *shares in
the company that carry the right to receive any dividends that the company may
pay, that ownership is held by the entity to the extent of the test percentage
of those dividends.
Capital distributions
(4) The third test is that, after tracing, to the
*ultimate owners who ultimately hold it, the
direct and indirect ownership of all *shares in
the company that carry the right to receive any distribution of capital of the
company, that ownership is held by the entity to the extent of the test
percentage of the distribution.
Certain shares ignored
(5) In tracing the ownership of *shares
in a company, ignore *shares whose
*dividends can reasonably be regarded as being
equivalent to the payment of interest on a loan having regard to:
(a) how the dividends are calculated; and
(b) the conditions applying to the payment of the dividends; and
(c) any other relevant matters.
(1) This section sets out 2 tests of whether an entity has an
ultimate stake of a particular percentage (the test
percentage) in a *fixed
trust.
Note: In applying the tests, follow the rules in
section 727-415.
Income distributions
(2) The first test is that, after tracing, to the
*ultimate owners who ultimately hold them, the
direct and indirect rights to receive distributions of trust income, those
rights are held by the entity to the extent of the test percentage of each such
distribution.
Capital distributions
(3) The second test is that, after tracing, to the
*ultimate owners who ultimately hold them, the
direct and indirect rights to receive distributions of trust capital, those
rights are held by the entity to the extent of the test percentage of each such
distribution.
(1) In applying sections 727-400, 727-405 and 727-410, follow the
rules in this section.
Interposed entities
(2) Tracing is to be done through any interposed entities.
Ownership or rights held jointly
(3) If some of the ownership or rights of a particular kind in relation to
a company or trust are held by 2 or more entities jointly or in common, each of
the entities is treated as holding a proportion of the ownership or rights so
held. The proportion is to be worked out on a reasonable basis, so that the
total of the proportions equals the total of the ownership or rights so
held.
Ownership or rights held by associate
(4) If, at a particular time:
(a) an *ultimate owner is an
*associate of another ultimate owner;
and
(b) the associate ultimately holds some of the ownership or rights of a
particular kind in relation to a company or trust;
then, in determining whether the other ultimate owner is one of 2 or more
ultimate owners because of whom the conditions in an item in the table in
section 727-400 are satisfied, the ownership or rights of that kind in
relation to the company or trust held by the associate at that time:
(c) to the extent of a particular percentage, may be treated as being
instead held by the other ultimate owner; and
(d) to the extent so treated, cannot be treated as being instead held by
any other ultimate owner of whom the first ultimate owner is an
associate.
(5) If one or more applications of subsection (4) are necessary to
establish that an *ultimate owner is one of 2
or more ultimate owners because of whom the conditions in an item in the table
in section 727-400 are satisfied, that subsection must be applied
accordingly.
This Subdivision tells you:
• which method to use to work out the consequences of an indirect
value shift for equity or loan interests, and indirect equity or loan interests,
in the losing entity and in the gaining entity; and
• which interests, and which owners, are affected.
Operative provisions
727-455 Consequences of the indirect value
shift
Affected interests
727-460 Affected interests in the losing
entity
727-465 Affected interests in the gaining
entity
727-470 Exceptions
727-520 Equity or loan interest and related
terms
727-525 Indirect equity or loan
interest
Affected owners
727-530 Who are the affected
owners
Choices about method to be used
727-550 Choosing the adjustable value
method
727-555 Giving other affected owners information about the
choice
[This is the end of the Guide.]
The consequences (if any) of an
*indirect value shift must be worked out using
the *realisation time method unless the
*adjustable value method is chosen in
accordance with section 727-550.
Note: Later provisions of this Subdivision set out the
interests to which those consequences apply (see sections 727-460 to
727-525), which are in turn determined by who are the affected owners (see
section 727-530).
These are the affected interests in the
*losing entity:
(a) each *equity or loan interest that an
*affected owner owns in the losing entity
immediately before the *IVS time; and
(b) each equity or loan interest that:
(i) an affected owner owns in another affected owner immediately before
the IVS time; and
(ii) is an *indirect equity or loan
interest in the losing entity;
(except one covered by an exception in section 727-470).
If immediately before the *IVS time the
*gaining entity is a company or trust (except
one listed in section 727-125 (about superannuation entities)), these are
the affected interests in the gaining entity:
(a) each *equity or loan interest that an
*affected owner owns in the gaining entity
immediately before the *IVS time; and
(b) each equity or loan interest that:
(i) an affected owner owns in another affected owner immediately before
the IVS time; and
(ii) is an *indirect equity or loan
interest in the gaining entity.
(except one covered by an exception in
section 727-470).
Mere active participants
(1) An *equity or loan interest that an
*active participant in the
*scheme owns in another active participant
immediately before the *IVS time is not an
*affected interest in the
*losing entity or in the
*gaining entity unless one of the active
participants is also covered by 1, 2, 3 or 4 in the table in subsection
727-530(1) (about who is an affected owner).
Entity that is eligible to be an STS taxpayer, or satisfies the maximum
net asset value test for small business relief
(2) An *equity or loan interest that an
entity (the owner) owns immediately before the
*IVS time is not an
*affected interest in the
*losing entity or in the
*gaining entity if the owner:
(a) is eligible to be an *STS taxpayer
for each income year that includes any of the
*IVS period; or
(b) would satisfy the maximum net asset value test in section 152-15
throughout the *IVS period.
(3) If the owner is not in existence for part of the
*IVS period, disregard that part in applying
subsection (2).
Interests in superannuation entities not covered
(4) An *equity or loan interest in an
*affected owner is not an
*affected interest in the
*losing entity or in the
*gaining entity if the affected owner is an
entity listed in section 727-125 (about superannuation entities) in
relation to the income year in which the *IVS
time happens.
[The next section is section 727-520.]
(1) An equity or loan interest in an entity is a
*primary interest, or a
*secondary interest, in the entity.
(2) A primary interest in an entity is a
*primary equity interest, or a
*primary loan interest, in the
entity.
(3) The meaning of primary equity interest in an entity is
set out in the table.
|
Primary equity interests |
||
|---|---|---|
|
Item |
In the case of this kind of entity: |
Primary equity interest means: |
|
1 |
a company |
a *share in the company; or an interest as joint owner (including as tenant in common) of a
*share in the company |
|
2 |
a trust |
any of these: |
(4) A primary loan interest in an entity is:
(a) a *loan to the entity; or
(b) an interest as joint owner (including as tenant in common) of a loan
to the entity.
(5) A secondary interest in an entity is a
*secondary equity interest, or a
*secondary loan interest, in the
entity.
(6) A secondary equity interest in an entity is a right or
option:
(a) to *acquire an existing
*primary equity interest in the entity;
or
(b) to have the entity issue a new primary equity interest.
(7) A secondary loan interest in an entity is a right or
option:
(a) to *acquire an existing
*primary loan interest in the entity;
or
(b) to have the entity issue a new primary loan interest.
An *equity or loan interest in an entity
is an indirect equity or loan interest in another entity if, and
only if:
(a) the first entity owns an equity or loan interest in the other entity;
or
(b) the first entity owns an equity or loan interest that is an indirect
equity or loan interest in the other entity because of one or more other
applications of this section.
[The next section is section 727-530.]
(1) The table sets out the affected owners for the
*indirect value shift.
|
Affected owners |
||
|---|---|---|
|
Item |
In this case: |
The affected owners include: |
|
1 |
At least one condition in section 727-105 (ultimate controller test)
is satisfied |
each *ultimate controller because of which
a condition in that section is satisfied; and each entity that, at a time during the
*IVS period when such an ultimate controller
*controlled (for value shifting purposes) the
losing entity, was an *intermediate
controller of the losing entity; and each entity that, at a time during the IVS period when such an ultimate
controller controlled (for value shifting purposes) the gaining entity,
was an intermediate controller of the gaining entity |
|
2 |
The conditions in section 727-110 (common-ownership nexus test) are
satisfied in respect of: |
each *ultimate owner who is one of 2 or
more ultimate owners because of whom the condition in the applicable item of
that table is satisfied in respect of any of those times; and each entity through which ownership or rights are traced to such an
ultimate owner in applying the applicable item of that table in respect of any
of those times |
|
3 |
Any case |
the *losing entity and the
*gaining entity |
|
4 |
Any case |
each entity that, at any time after the
*scheme was entered into, is an
*associate of an entity that is an affected
owner because of item 1, 2 or 3 of this table |
|
5 |
Any case |
each *active participant in the
*scheme |
(2) An entity is an intermediate controller of another
entity if, and only if:
(a) the first entity *controls (for value
shifting purposes) the other entity; and
(b) the first entity is *controlled (for
value shifting purposes) by an *ultimate
controller of the other entity.
Active participants (if both losing and gaining entities are closely
held)
(3) An entity (the first entity) is an active
participant in the *scheme
if:
(a) at some time during the *IVS period,
neither the losing entity nor the gaining entity has 300 or more members (in the
case of a company) or 300 or more beneficiaries (in the case of a trust);
and
(b) the first entity:
(i) actively participated in, or directly facilitated, the entering into
of the *scheme; or
(ii) at some time during the *IVS period
actively participated in, or directly facilitated, the carrying out of the
scheme;
(whether or not it did so at the direction of some other entity);
and
(c) at some time during the *IVS period,
the first entity owned:
(i) an *equity or loan interest in the
losing entity or in the gaining entity; or
(ii) an *indirect equity or loan interest
in the losing entity or in the gaining entity; and
(d) the first entity is neither the losing entity nor the gaining
entity.
Note: Subsections 727-110(2) and (3) contain rules about
when an entity is treated as having or not having 300 or more members or
beneficiaries.
(1) This section sets out rules for:
(a) choosing to use the *adjustable value
method to work out the consequences of an
*indirect value shift; or
(b) choosing (when using the adjustable value method) not to work
out on a *loss-focussed basis the reductions in
the *adjustable values of
*affected interests.
Who makes the choice
(2) The choice must be made in accordance with the table.
|
Who makes the choice |
||
|---|---|---|
|
Item |
In this case: |
The choice must be made by: |
|
1 |
If the conditions in section 727-110 (common-ownership nexus test) are
satisfied |
jointly by the *ultimate owners because of
whom the condition in the applicable item of the table in section 727-400
is satisfied |
|
2 |
Item 1 does not apply, and there is an entity: |
that entity |
|
3 |
Neither of items 1 and 2 applies |
jointly by the 2 or more *ultimate
controllers because of whom the conditions in section 727-105 (ultimate
controller test) are satisfied |
When choice must be made
(3) The choice must be made within 2 years after the first
*realisation event that happens to an
*affected interest at or after the IVS
time.
Choice binds all affected owners
(4) The choice binds all *affected owners
for the *indirect value shift.
(1) An entity that makes a choice under section 727-550 (including a
choice made jointly with one or more other entities) must inform all entities
that it knows to be *affected owners for the
*indirect value shift about the content of the
choice. The entity must do so in writing within one month after making the
choice.
Penalty: 30 penalty units.
(2) If:
(a) a choice under section 727-550 is made jointly by 2 or more
entities; and
(b) one of the entities complies with subsection (1);
no other entity need comply with that subsection in relation to that
choice.
(3) If an *affected owner for an
*indirect value shift has reason to believe
that an entity may have made a choice under section 727-550 (including a
choice made jointly with one or more other entities), the affected owner may
give the entity a written notice asking whether the entity has made such a
choice.
(4) Within one month after receiving a notice under subsection (3),
an entity must inform the *affected owner in
writing whether the entity has made a choice under section 727-550 and, if
so, about the content of the choice.
Penalty: 30 penalty units.
(5) The Commissioner may extend the period for complying with a provision
of this section.
Under the realisation time method:
• losses on realisation of affected interests in the losing entity
are reduced; and
• gains on realisation of affected interests in the gaining entity
are reduced, within limits worked out by reference to the reductions in losses
on affected interests in the losing entity; and
• certain 95% services indirect value shifts are
disregarded.
This Subdivision also explains how its
reduction of a loss or gain affects CGT assets, trading stock and revenue
assets.
Table of sections
Operative provisions
727-610 Consequences of indirect value
shift
727-615 Reduction of loss on realisation event for affected
interest in losing entity
727-620 Reduction of gain on realisation event for affected
interest in gaining entity
727-625 Total gain reductions not to exceed total loss
reductions
727-630 How cap in section 727-625 applies if affected
interest is also trading stock or a revenue asset
727-635 Splitting an equity or loan
interest
727-640 Merging equity or loan interests
727-645 Effect of CGT roll-over
Further exclusion for certain 95% services indirect value shifts if
realisation time method must be used
727-700 When 95% services indirect value shift is
excluded
95% services indirect value shifts that are
not excluded
727-705 Another provision of the income tax law affects
amount related to services by at least $100,000
727-710 Ongoing or recent service arrangement reduces value
of losing entity by at least $100,000
727-715 Service arrangements reduce value of losing entity
that is a group service provider by at least
$500,000
727-720 Abnormal service arrangement reduces value of losing
entity that is not a group service provider by at least
$500,000
727-725 Meaning of predominantly-services indirect
value shift
[This is the end of the Guide.]
(1) This Subdivision sets out the realisation time method of
working out the consequences (if any) of an
*indirect value shift.
(2) If those consequences are to be worked out using that method, this
Subdivision applies to each *realisation
event:
(a) by which a loss would, apart from this Division, be
*realised for income tax purposes;
and
(b) that happens to an *affected interest
in the *losing entity; and
(c) that is the first realisation event that happens to that interest at
or after the *IVS time; and
(d) that happens:
(i) if the amount of the indirect value shift is $500,000 or more—at
any time after the IVS time; or
(ii) otherwise—within 4 years after the IVS time.
(3) If:
(a) those consequences are to be worked out using that method;
and
(b) the *gaining entity is a company or
trust (except one listed in section 727-125 (about superannuation
entities)) immediately before the *IVS
time;
this Subdivision applies to each
*realisation event:
(c) by which a gain would, apart from this Division,
be *realised for income tax purposes;
and
(d) that happens to an *affected interest
in the *gaining entity; and
(e) that is the first realisation event that happens to that interest at
or after the IVS time.
(4) The consequences for the *affected
interest depend on its character. There are consequences for the interest in its
character as a *CGT asset. However, if the
interest is also *trading stock or a
*revenue asset, there are additional
consequences for it in that character.
(5) In working out the consequences for an
*affected interest in the
*losing entity or
*gaining entity, in the interest’s
character as *trading stock, a
*realisation event is disregarded for the
purposes of identifying under paragraph (2)(c) or (3)(e) the first
realisation event that happens to that interest at or after the
*IVS time, if:
(a) the realisation event consists of the ending of an income year;
and
(b) the *value of the interest as trading
stock on hand of an entity at the end of the income year is the interest’s
*cost; and
(c) the interest became part of the entity’s trading stock on hand
during that income year, or the value of the interest as trading stock of the
entity on hand at the start of the income year was also the interest’s
cost.
If this Subdivision applies to a
*realisation event that happens to an
*affected interest in the
*losing entity, a loss that would, apart from
this Division, be *realised for income tax
purposes by the event is reduced by an amount that is reasonable having regard
to:
(a) a reasonable estimate of the amount (if any) by which the
*indirect value shift has reduced the
interest’s market value; and
(b) if the interest is also an affected interest in the
*gaining entity—a reasonable estimate of
the extent (if any) to which the interest’s market value at the time of
the realisation event still reflects the effect of the indirect value shift on
the market value of *equity or loan interests
in the gaining entity.
If this Subdivision applies to a
*realisation event that happens to an
*affected interest in the
*gaining entity, a gain that would, apart from
this Division, be *realised for income tax
purposes by the event is reduced by an amount that is reasonable having regard
to:
(a) a reasonable estimate of the amount (if any) by which the
*indirect value shift has increased the
interest’s market value; and
(b) a reasonable estimate of the extent (if any) to which the
interest’s market value at the time of the realisation event still
reflects the effect of the indirect value shift on the market value of
*equity or loan interests in the gaining
entity.
(1) This section ensures that the total (total gain
reductions) of the amounts by which section 727-620 reduces gains
*realised for income tax purposes by
*realisation events happening at the same time
does not exceed the total (total loss reductions) of:
(a) the amounts by which section 727-615 reduces losses
that:
(i) would, apart from this Division, be
*realised for income tax purposes by
*realisation events happening before or at that
time; and
(ii) have not already been taken into account in a previous application of
this section; and
(b) the amounts by which section 727-850 (as applying to the
*scheme from which the
*indirect value shift results) reduces losses
that:
(i) would, apart from this Division, be realised for income tax purposes
by realisation events happening before the *IVS
time to *equity or loan interests, or
*indirect equity or loan interests, in the
*losing entity; and
(ii) have not already been taken into account in a previous application of
this section.
(2) If, apart from this section, the total gain reductions would exceed
the total loss reductions, the amount by which section 727-620 reduces each
of the gains is itself reduced by the amount worked out using this
formula:![]()
(3) For the purposes of the formula:
number of interests means the number of
*affected interests in the
*gaining entity to which
*realisation events happened at that
time.
(1) This section affects how to work out the total gain reductions and the
total loss reductions for the purposes of section 727-625 if:
(a) a *realisation event covered by that
section happens to an *equity or loan interest,
or to an *indirect equity or loan interest, in
the *losing entity or in the
*gaining entity; and
(b) the interest is also *trading stock
or a *revenue asset at the time of the
event.
Trading stock
(2) In the case of an *equity or loan
interest, or an *indirect equity or loan
interest, in the *losing entity that is
*trading stock at that time:
(a) the amount (if any) by which section 727-615 or 727-850 reduces a
loss worked out under section 977-25 or 977-30 (about realisation events
for trading stock) that would, apart from this Division, be
*realised for income tax purposes by the event
is taken into account; and
(b) the amount (if any) by which section 727-615 or 727-850 reduces a
loss worked out under section 977-10 (about realisation events for CGT
assets) that would, apart from this Division, be
*realised for income tax purposes by the event
is not taken into account;
in working out the total loss reductions.
(3) In the case of an *affected interest
in the *gaining entity that is
*trading stock at that time:
(a) the amount (if any) by which section 727-620 reduces a gain
worked out under section 977-35 or 977-40 (about realisation events for
trading stock) that would, apart from this Division, be
*realised for income tax purposes by the event
is taken into account; and
(b) the amount (if any) by which section 727-620 reduces a gain
worked out under section 977-15 (about realisation events for CGT assets)
that would, apart from this Division, be
*realised for income tax purposes by the event
is not taken into account;
in working out the total gain reductions.
Revenue asset
(4) In the case of an *equity or loan
interest, or an *indirect equity or loan
interest, in the *losing entity that is a
*revenue asset at that time, the greater of the
following is taken into account in working out the total loss
reductions:
(a) the amount (if any) by which section 727-615 or 727-850 reduces a
loss worked out under section 977-55 (about realisation events for revenue
assets) that would, apart from this Division, be
*realised for income tax purposes by the
event;
(b) the amount (if any) by which section 727-615 or 727-850 reduces a
loss worked out under section 977-10 (about realisation events for CGT
assets) that would, apart from this Division, be
*realised for income tax purposes by the
event.
(5) In the case of an *affected interest
in the *gaining entity that is a
*revenue asset at that time, the greater of the
following amounts is taken into account in working out the total gain
reductions:
(a) the amount (if any) by which section 727-620 reduces a gain
worked out under section 977-55 (about realisation events for revenue
assets) that would, apart from this Division, be
*realised for income tax purposes by the
event;
(b) the amount (if any) by which section 727-620 reduces a gain
worked out under section 977-15 (about realisation events for CGT assets)
that would, apart from this Division, be
*realised for income tax purposes by the
event.
If an *equity or loan interest in the
*losing entity or in the
*gaining entity is split into 2 or more equity
or loan interests at or after the *IVS
time:
(a) each of the 2 or more interests inherits whatever characteristics
would have been relevant to applying this Subdivision to the first interest if
the split had not happened; and
(b) those characteristics include characteristics the first interest has
inherited because of any other application or applications of this section or
section 727-640; and
(c) if a characteristic of the first interest involves an amount or
quantity, the amount or quantity for that characteristic as inherited by each of
the 2 or more interests is a reasonable proportion of the amount or quantity for
that characteristic of the first interest.
If 2 or more *equity or loan interests
(the original interests) in the
*losing entity or in the
*gaining entity are merged into 1 or more
*equity or loan interests (the new
interests) at or after the *IVS
time:
(a) each of the new interests inherits whatever characteristics would have
been relevant to applying this Subdivision to the original interests if the
merging had not happened; and
(b) those characteristics include characteristics inherited by any of the
original interests because of any other application or applications of this
section or section 727-635; and
(c) if a characteristic of any of the original interests involves an
amount or quantity, the amount or quantity for that characteristic as inherited
by any of the new interests is a reasonable proportion of the amount or quantity
for that characteristic of the original interest.
(1) If:
(a) this Subdivision applies to a
*realisation event that is a
*CGT event that happens to an
*affected interest in the
*losing entity; and
(b) section 727-615 reduces a loss that would, apart from this
Division, be *realised for income tax purposes
by the CGT event; and
(c) there is a roll-over for the CGT event;
the interest’s *reduced cost base at
the time of the CGT event is taken to have been reduced by the amount by which
section 727-615 reduces that loss, but is so taken only for the purposes of
working out:
(d) the interest’s reduced cost base, from time to time after the
roll-over, for the entity that *acquired the
interest because of the CGT event; and
(e) in the case of a *replacement-asset
roll-over—the reduced cost base of the replacement CGT asset, from time to
time after the roll-over, for the entity that
*disposed of the interest.
Note: Because of the roll-over, the loss reduction under
section 727-615 will have no tax effect. This subsection ensures that the
loss reduction is passed on, through the reduction in reduced cost base, to
prevent or reduce a loss arising on a later CGT event.
(2) If:
(a) this Subdivision applies to a
*realisation event that is a
*CGT event that happens to an
*affected interest in the
*gaining entity; and
(b) section 727-620 reduces a gain that would, apart from this
Division, be *realised for income tax purposes
by the CGT event; and
(c) there is a roll-over for the CGT event;
the interest’s *cost base at the
time of the CGT event is taken to have been uplifted by the amount by which
section 727-620 reduces that gain, but is so taken only for the purposes of
working out:
(d) the interest’s cost base, from time to time after the roll-over,
for the entity that *acquired the interest
because of the CGT event; and
(e) in the case of a *replacement-asset
roll-over—the cost base of the replacement CGT asset, from time to time
after the roll-over, for the entity that
*disposed of the interest.
Note: Because of the roll-over, the gain reduction under
section 727-620 will have no tax effect. This subsection ensures that the
gain reduction is passed on, through the uplift in cost base, to prevent or
reduce a gain arising on a later CGT event.
[The next section is section 727-700.]
(1) If the *indirect value shift is a
*95% services indirect value shift, this
Subdivision does not apply to a *realisation
event that:
(a) happens to an *affected interest in
the *losing entity that is owned by an entity
(the owner); and
(b) is covered by subsection 727-610(2);
unless:
(c) the conditions in section 727-705 are met for the indirect value
shift; or
(d) the conditions in section 727-710, 727-715 or 727-720 are met for
the indirect value shift and for that realisation event.
(2) An *indirect value shift is a
95% services indirect value shift if, and only if, to the extent
of at least 95% of their total market value, the
*greater benefits consist entirely
of:
(a) a right to have services that are covered by section 727-240
provided directly by the *losing entity to the
*gaining entity; or
(b) services that are covered by section 727-240 and have been, are
being, or are to be, so provided;
or both.
(3) This section does not limit any other exclusion in this Subdivision or
in Subdivision 727-C.
The conditions in this section are met if:
(a) the *losing entity or the
*gaining entity lodges an
*income tax return for an income year during
some or all of which the owner owned the interest; and
(b) a provision of this Act:
(i) reduces or excludes an amount that is included in the return;
or
(ii) increases an amount that is so included; or
(iii) includes an amount not included in the return;
for the purposes of working out the taxable income, a
*tax loss, or a
*net capital loss, of that entity for that
income year; and
(c) the amount is related to the right mentioned in paragraph
727-700(2)(a), or to some or all of the services mentioned in paragraph
727-700(2)(a) or (b), from the point of view of the losing entity providing the
services or of the gaining entity receiving them; and
(d) if the amount is so reduced or increased—the reduction or
increase is at least $100,000; and
(e) if the amount is so excluded or included—the amount is at least
$100,000; and
(f) at some time after the return is lodged, the entity that lodged it is
aware, or ought reasonably to be aware, of the reduction, exclusion, increase or
inclusion.
Example: If the Commissioner has notified an entity affected
by a determination under Part IVA of the Income Tax Assessment Act
1936, the entity ought reasonably to be aware of the effect of the
determination.
(1) Either or both of these must be true:
(a) when the *realisation event mentioned
in subsection 727-700(1) happens, some or all of the services mentioned in
paragraph 727-700(2)(a) or (b) have not yet been provided; or
(b) some or all of those services have been provided in the income year
(of the *losing entity) in which the
realisation event happens, or in the previous income year.
(2) It must be reasonable to conclude that the total (the total
market value) of the market values, immediately before the
*realisation event, of
*primary interests in the
*losing entity then owned by
*affected owners is less than it would have
been if none of the following had happened:
(a) the *95% services indirect value
shift; and
(b) all other *predominantly-services
indirect value shifts that satisfy subsection (1) (or that would satisfy it
if they were *95% services indirect value
shifts).
(3) It must also be reasonable to conclude that the total market value is
less than it would have been by at least:
(a) $100,000, if the total of the
*adjustable values, immediately before the
*realisation event, of the
*primary interests referred to in
subsection (2) is less than or equal to $2,000,000; or
(b) 5% of the total of those *adjustable
values, if that total is greater than $2,000,000 and less than or equal to
$10,000,000; or
(c) $500,000, if that total is greater than $10,000,000.
(4) For the purposes of subsections (2) and (3), disregard an
*indirect value shift referred to in
paragraph (2)(a) or (b) if services are provided directly by the
*losing entity to the
*gaining entity under the
*scheme before the income year (of the losing
entity) before the one in which the
*realisation event happened.
(1) At some time during the period (the ownership period)
when the owner owned the interest, the sole or dominant activity of the
*losing entity must consist of providing
services directly to one or more entities (the group entities)
each of which is covered by one or more of the following paragraphs:
(a) the *gaining entity;
(b) an *affected owner;
(c) an entity that has at that time the same
*ultimate controller as the losing entity or
the gaining entity;
(d) if the conditions in section 727-110 (common-ownership nexus
test) are satisfied for the *indirect value
shift—an entity that has with the losing entity or with the gaining entity
a *common-ownership nexus within that
period.
(2) It must be reasonable to conclude that the total (the total
market value) of the market values, immediately before the
*realisation event, of
*primary interests in the
*losing entity then owned by
*affected owners is less than it would have
been if none of the following had happened:
(a) the *95% services indirect value
shift; and
(b) each *predominantly-services indirect
value shift for which the same entity is the losing entity as for the 95%
services indirect value shift, and that happened:
(i) if the amount of the *indirect value
shift is $500,000 or more—at any time during the ownership period;
or
(ii) otherwise—during the ownership period but within 4 years before
the realisation event, or at the same time as the realisation event.
Thresholds for reduction of the total market value
(3) It must also be reasonable to conclude that the total market value is
less than it would have been by at least $500,000, and by at least the lesser
of:
(a) 5% of the total of the *adjustable
values of *primary interests in the
*losing entity owned by
*affected owners at:
(i) if subsection (4) applies—the time determined under that
subsection; or
(ii) otherwise—the start of the income year in which the
*realisation event happens; and
(b) the amount worked out under the table.
|
Alternative threshold for reduction of the total market
value |
||
|---|---|---|
|
Item |
In this case: |
The amount is: |
|
1 |
The ownership period is 4 years or less |
worked out using this formula:
|
|
2 |
The ownership period is more than 4 years |
$25,000,000 |
(4) If the owner of the interest is an
*affected owner because of item 1, 2, 3 or
4 in the table in subsection 727-530(1) (about who is an affected owner), the
time for the purposes of subparagraph (3)(a)(i) of this section is the
latest of:
(a) the start of the income year in which the
*realisation event happens; and
(b) the most recent time (if any), before or at the time of the
*realisation event, when at least one of the
group entities has the same *ultimate
controller as the losing entity or the gaining entity; and
(c) the start of the most recent period (if any):
(i) that ended before or at the time of the realisation event;
and
(ii) within which at least one of the group entities has with the losing
entity or with the gaining entity a
*common-ownership nexus.
(1) It must be the case that at no time during the period when the
owner owned the interest did the sole or dominant activity of the
*losing entity consist of providing services as
mentioned in subsection 727-715(1).
(2) It must be reasonable to conclude that the total (the total
market value) of the market values, immediately before the
*realisation event, of
*primary interests in the
*losing entity then owned by
*affected owners is less than it would have
been if none of the following had happened:
(a) the *95% services indirect value
shift;
(b) each *predominantly-services indirect
value shift that meets either of these conditions:
(i) its amount was less than $500,000 and it happened within 4 years
before the realisation event, or at the same time as the realisation
event;
(ii) its amount was $500,000 or more and it happened at any time before
the realisation event, or at the same time as the realisation event;
and that meets all of these conditions:
(iii) the same entity is the losing entity for it as for the 95% services
indirect value shift;
(iv) it happened under a different
*scheme from the 95% services indirect value
shift; and
(v) having regard to all relevant circumstances, it is reasonable to
conclude that the sole or main reason why it happened under a different scheme
was to prevent the conditions in section 727-705, 727-710, 727-715 or this
section from being met.
(3) It must also be reasonable to conclude that the total market value is
less than it would have been by at least:
(a) $500,000, if the total of the
*adjustable values, immediately before the
*realisation event, of the
*primary interests referred to in
subsection (2) is less than or equal to $10,000,000; or
(b) 5% of the total of those *adjustable
values, if that total is greater than $10,000,000 and less than or equal to
$100,000,000; or
(c) $5,000,000, if that total is greater than $100,000,000.
(4) The providing of the services mentioned in paragraph 727-700(2)(a) or
(b) by the losing entity must not be in the ordinary course of its
business.
An *indirect value shift is a
predominantly-services indirect value shift if, and only if, the
*greater benefits consist entirely or
predominantly of:
(a) a right to have services that are covered by section 727-240
provided directly by the *losing entity to the
*gaining entity; or
(b) services that are covered by section 727-240 and have been, are
being, or are to be, so provided;
or both.
Under the adjustable value method:
• the adjustable values of affected interests in the losing entity
are reduced; and
• the adjustable values of affected interests in the gaining entity
are uplifted, within limits worked out by references to the reductions in the
adjustable values of affected interests in the losing entity.
The consequences of that are:
• the cost base and reduced cost base of the interests are reduced or
uplifted (or both); and
•
if the interests are also trading stock or revenue assets, there are
further consequences for them in their character as such.
727-755 Consequences of indirect value
shift
Reductions of adjustable value
727-770 Reduction under the adjustable value
method
727-775 Has there been a disaggregated attributable
decrease?
727-780 Working out the reduction on a loss-focussed
basis
Uplifts of adjustable value
727-800 Uplift under the attributable increase
method
727-805 Has there been a disaggregated attributable
increase?
727-810 Scaling-down formula
Consequences of the method for various kinds of assets
727-830 CGT assets
727-835 Trading stock
727-840 Revenue assets
[This is the end of the Guide.]
(1) This Subdivision sets out the adjustable value method of
working out the consequences (if any) of an
*indirect value shift.
(2) If those consequences are to be worked out using that
method:
(a) the *adjustable value of each
*affected interest in the
*losing entity is reduced as provided in this
Subdivision; and
(b) if the *gaining entity is a company
or trust (except one listed in section 727-125 (about superannuation
entities)) immediately before the *IVS time,
the *adjustable value of each
*affected interest in the
*gaining entity is uplifted as provided in this
Subdivision.
(3) The consequences for the *affected
interest depend on its character. There are consequences for the interest in its
character as a *CGT asset. However, if the
interest is also *trading stock or a
*revenue asset, there are additional
consequences for it in that character.
[The next section is section 727-770.]
(1) This section sets out how to work out the amount (if any) by which the
*adjustable value of an
*affected interest in the
*losing entity is reduced.
(2) First, work out under section 727-775 whether the
*indirect value shift has produced for the
owner of the interest a *disaggregated
attributable decrease in the market value of the interest.
(3) If it has not, the interest’s
*adjustable value is not reduced because
of the *indirect value shift.
(4) If it has, the amount (if any) by which the interest’s
*adjustable value is reduced is worked out on a
*loss-focussed basis under
section 727-780.
(5) However, if a choice is made in accordance with section 727-550
for the reduction not to be worked out on a
*loss-focussed basis, the reduction is equal to
the *disaggregated attributable
decrease.
Reduction not to exceed reasonable amount
(6) If the reduction worked out as provided in subsection (4) or (5)
is not reasonable in the circumstances, having regard to the objects of this
Division, the interest’s *adjustable
value is instead reduced by so much of that reduction as is reasonable in the
circumstances, having regard to those objects.
Note: The main object of this Division is set out in
section 727-95.
(1) This section sets out how to determine whether an
*indirect value shift has produced, for the
owner of an *equity or loan interest, a
disaggregated attributable decrease in the market value of the
interest and, if so, the amount of it.
(2) Work out the market value of the interest at the
*IVS time, but disregarding:
(a) all effects on the market value of the interest during the
*IVS period, except effects that are reasonably
attributable to the *indirect value shift;
and
(b) the effects (if any) of the indirect value shift on the market value
of *equity or loan interests, or
*indirect equity or loan interests, in the
gaining entity.
(This result is called the notional resulting market
value.)
Note: Paragraph (2)(b) is necessary because the market
value of the interest may also have been affected by the increase in the market
value of interests in the gaining entity, because the entity in which the
interest is held had direct or indirect interests in both the losing entity and
the gaining entity.
In such a case, the reduction in adjustable value under
this Division will usually be offset by an uplift under this
Division.
(3) If the notional resulting market value is less than the market
value (the old market value) of the interest:
(a) at the start of the *IVS period;
or
(b) if the owner last began to own the interest during that
period—when the owner last began to own the interest;
the difference is the disaggregated attributable
decrease.
(4) The *indirect value shift has
not produced a disaggregated attributable decrease for the owner of the
interest if the notional resulting market value is greater than or equal
to the old market value.
(5) The market value of the interest at a particular time may be worked
out under subsection (2) or (3) by making a reasonable estimate of that
market value.
(1) Use the table in subsection (2) of this section to work out on a
loss-focussed basis the amount (if any) by which the
interest’s *adjustable value is
reduced.
(2) This involves comparing the old market value, and the notional
resulting market value, with the interest’s
*adjustable value (the old adjustable
value) immediately before the *IVS
time.
|
Reduction under the attributable decrease method |
|||
|---|---|---|---|
|
Item |
If the old market value: |
And the notional resulting market value: |
This is the result: |
|
1 |
is greater than or equal to the old adjustable value |
is less than the old adjustable value |
the *adjustable value is reduced to the
notional resulting market value |
|
2 |
is greater than or equal to the old adjustable value |
is greater than or equal to the old adjustable value |
the *adjustable value is not
reduced because of the *indirect value
shift |
|
3 |
is less than the old adjustable value |
is less than the old adjustable value |
the *adjustable value is reduced by the
amount of the *disaggregated attributable
decrease |
Note 1: Because of item 1, the indirect value shift
cannot cause a loss to arise on disposal of the interest.
Note 2: Because of item 3 the loss already embedded in
the interest is preserved, but the indirect value shift does not increase
it.
[The next section is section 727-800.]
(1) This section sets out how to work out the amount (if any) by which the
*adjustable value of an
*affected interest in the
*gaining entity is uplifted.
(2) First, work out under section 727-805 whether the
*indirect value shift has produced for the
owner of the interest a *disaggregated
attributable increase in the market value of the interest.
(3) If it has not, the interest’s
*adjustable value is not uplifted
because of the *indirect value shift.
(4) If it has, the *adjustable value is
uplifted by the amount worked out using the scaling-down formula in
section 727-810, subject to the rest of this section.
Note: The uplift will be less than or equal to the
disaggregated attributable increase.
Cap if interest has both a disaggregated attributable increase and a
disaggregated attributable decrease
(5) If the *indirect value shift has also
produced for the owner of the interest a
*disaggregated attributable decrease in the
market value of the interest, the interest’s
*adjustable value:
(a) is not uplifted if it is not also reduced under this Division
because of the indirect value shift; and
(b) if it is also reduced under this Division because of the indirect
value shift—is not uplifted by more than the reduction.
Cap based on notional distribution by gaining entity of dividends or
capital equal to total reductions in adjustable value of affected interests in
losing entity
(6) However, the interest’s
*adjustable value is not uplifted by more than
the greater of these amounts:
(a) the amount (if any) that the
*affected owner of the interest would receive
(directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) in respect of
the interest if:
(i) the *gaining entity were to pay as
*dividends, at the time (the payment
time) immediately before the *IVS time,
an amount (the total reduction amount) equal to the total of the
amounts by which the *adjustable values of
*equity or loan interests in the
*losing entity are reduced under this
Subdivision because of the *indirect value
shift; and
(ii) those dividends were successively paid or distributed at the payment
time by each entity interposed between the gaining entity and that affected
owner; and
(b) the amount (if any) that the
*affected owner of the interest would receive
(directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) in respect of
the interest if:
(i) the gaining entity were to pay the total reduction amount at the
payment time as a distribution of capital; and
(ii) that capital was successively paid or distributed at the payment time
by each entity interposed between the gaining entity and that affected
owner.
Uplift not to exceed reasonable amount
(7) If the uplift worked out as provided in subsections (4), (5) and
(6) is not reasonable in the circumstances, having regard to the objects of this
Division, the interest’s *adjustable
value is instead uplifted by an amount that is reasonable in the circumstances,
having regard to those objects.
Note: The main object of this Division is set out in
section 727-95.
(1) This section sets out how to determine whether an
*indirect value shift has produced, for the
owner of an *equity or loan interest, a
disaggregated attributable increase in the market value of the
interest and, if so, the amount of it.
(2) Make a reasonable estimate of the market value of the interest at the
*IVS time, but disregarding:
(a) all effects on the market value of the interest during the
*IVS period, except effects that are reasonably
attributable to the *indirect value shift;
and
(b) the effects (if any) of the indirect value shift on the market value
of *equity or loan interests, or
*indirect equity or loan interests, in the
losing entity.
(This result is called the notional resulting market
value.)
Note: Paragraph (2)(b) is necessary because the market
value of the interest may also have been affected by the decrease in the market
value of interests in the losing entity, because the entity in which the
interest is held had direct or indirect interests in both the losing entity and
the gaining entity.
In such a case, the increase in adjustable value under this
Division will usually be offset by a reduction under this
Division.
(3) If the notional resulting market value is greater than a
reasonable estimate of the market value (the old market value) of
the interest:
(a) at the start of the *IVS period;
or
(b) if the owner last began to own the interest during that
period—when the owner last began to own the interest;
the difference is the disaggregated attributable
increase.
(4) The *indirect value shift has
not produced a disaggregated attributable increase for the owner of the
interest if the notional resulting market value is less than or equal
to the old market value.
(1) The scaling-down formula for the purposes of section 727-800
is:
Note: The numerator in the fraction can never exceed the
denominator. This means that the fraction can never exceed 1, so the uplift will
never exceed the disaggregated attributable increase.
(2) For the purposes of the formula:
total disaggregated attributable decreases means the total
of:
(a) all *disaggregated attributable
decreases that the *indirect value shift has
produced, in the market values of *affected
interests in the *losing entity, for the
entities that owned those interests immediately before the
*IVS time; and
(b) if:
(i) section 727-850 (as applying to the
*scheme from which the indirect value shift
results) reduces losses that are *realised for
income tax purposes by *realisation events
happening before the *IVS time to
*equity or loan interests, or to
*indirect equity or loan interests, in the
losing entity; and
(ii) the indirect value shift is the only indirect value shift, or is the
greater or greatest of 2 or more indirect value shifts, that results from the
scheme and for which the losing entity is the losing entity;
for each of those realisation events, the amounts that would,
if:
(iii) the *presumed indirect value shift
were an indirect value shift; and
(iv) the IVS time for the presumed indirect value shift were the time of
that realisation event;
be the disaggregated attributable decreases that the presumed indirect
value shift has produced, in the market value of the equity or loan interests to
which that realisation event happened, for the entities that owned those
interests immediately before the time of that realisation event.
total reductions for affected interests means the total
of:
(a) all reductions under this Division, because of the indirect value
shift, of *adjustable values of affected
interests in the losing entity; and
(b) if paragraph (b) of the definition of total disaggregated
attributable decreases applies—the amounts by which
section 727-850 reduces the losses (if any) referred to in that
paragraph.
[The next section is section 727-830.]
(1) The *cost base of an
*equity or loan interest is reduced or uplifted
immediately before the *IVS time to the extent
that this Division provides for the *adjustable
value of the interest to be reduced or uplifted.
(2) The *reduced cost base of an
*equity or loan interest is reduced or uplifted
immediately before the *IVS time to the extent
that this Division provides for the *adjustable
value of the interest to be reduced or uplifted.
(3) However, the *cost base or
*reduced cost base is uplifted only to
the extent that the amount of the uplift is still reflected in the market value
of the interest when a later *CGT event happens
to the interest.
(4) To work out:
(a) whether the *cost base or
*reduced cost base of the interest is reduced
or uplifted; and
(b) if so, by how much;
assume that the adjustable value from time to time of that or
any other *equity or loan interest is its cost
base or reduced cost base, as appropriate.
(5) If this Division provides for the
*adjustable value of an
*equity or loan interest to be both
reduced and uplifted:
(a) the reduction and uplift for which subsection (1) or (2) of this
section provides offset each other to the extent of whichever of them is the
lesser; but
(b) if subsection (3) of this section cancels or reduces the uplift,
this subsection is taken always to have applied on that basis.
Reductions and uplifts also apply to pre-CGT assets
(6) A reduction or uplift occurs regardless of whether the entity that
owns the interest *acquired it before, on or
after 20 September 1985.
(1) This section deals with:
(a) how this Division applies to an
*equity or loan interest that is
*trading stock of an entity at the time (the
adjustment time) immediately before the
*IVS time; and
(b) the income tax consequences of this Division reducing or uplifting the
*adjustable value of the interest.
(2) The interest’s adjustable value at a particular
time is:
(a) if the interest has been *trading
stock of the entity ever since the start of the income year of the entity in
which that time occurs—its *value as
trading stock at the start of the income year; or
(b) otherwise—its cost.
(3) If this Division reduces or uplifts the interest’s
*adjustable value, the entity is treated as
if:
(a) immediately before the adjustment time, the entity had sold the
interest to someone else (at *arm’s
length and in the ordinary course of business) for its
*adjustable value immediately before that time;
and
(b) immediately after the adjustment time, the entity had bought the
interest back for the reduced or uplifted adjustable value.
Note: The notional sale and repurchase are separated in
time. As a result, if this section is applied to another indirect value shift
that happens later in the same income year, the interest’s adjustable
value will be the cost on the notional repurchase: see
paragraph (2)(b).
(4) However, the increase in the cost of an interest because of
paragraph (3)(b) is taken into account from time to time only to the extent
that the amount of the increase is still reflected in the market value of the
interest.
Note: The situations where the increase in cost would be
taken into account include:
• in working out your deductions for the cost of
trading stock acquired during the income year in which the increase happens;
and
• the end of an income year if the interest’s
closing value as trading stock is worked out on the basis of its cost;
and
• the start of the income year in which the interest
is disposed of, if that happens in a later income year and the interest’s
closing value as trading stock at the end of the previous income year was worked
out on the basis of its cost.
(5) If this Division provides for the
*adjustable value of the interest to be
both reduced and uplifted:
(a) the reduction and uplift offset each other to the extent of whichever
of them is the lesser, and subsection (3) of this section applies
accordingly; but
(b) to the extent that the amount of the uplift is no longer reflected in
the market value of the interest, this section is taken always to have applied
on the basis that the amount of the uplift was reduced to the same
extent.
(1) This section deals with:
(a) how this Division applies to an
*equity or loan interest that is a
*revenue asset of an entity at the time (the
adjustment time) immediately before the
*IVS time; and
(b) the income tax consequences of this Division reducing or uplifting the
*adjustable value of the interest.
(2) The interest’s adjustable value at a particular
time is the total of the amounts that would be subtracted from the gross
disposal proceeds in calculating any profit or loss on disposal of the interest
if the entity disposed of it at that time.
(3) If this Division reduces or uplifts the interest’s
*adjustable value, the entity is treated as
if:
(a) immediately before the adjustment time, the entity had sold the
interest to someone else (at *arm’s
length and in the ordinary course of business) for its adjustable value
immediately before that time; and
(b) immediately after the adjustment time, the entity had bought the
interest back for the reduced or uplifted adjustable value.
Note: The notional sale and repurchase are separated in
time. As a result, if this section is applied to another indirect value shift
that happens later in the same income year, the interest’s adjustable
value will be based on the cost on the notional repurchase: see
subsection (2).
(4) However, an uplift in the *adjustable
value of the interest is taken into account only to the extent that the amount
of the uplift is still reflected in the market value of the interest when it is
disposed of or otherwise realised.
(5) If this Division provides for the
*adjustable value of the interest to be
both reduced and uplifted:
(a) the reduction and uplift offset each other to the extent of whichever
of them is the lesser, and subsection (3) of this section applies
accordingly; but
(b) to the extent that the amount of the uplift is no longer reflected in
the market value of the interest, this section is taken always to have applied
on the basis that the amount of the uplift was reduced to the same
extent.
727-850 Consequences of scheme under this
Subdivision
727-855 Presumed indirect value shift
727-860 Conditions about the prospective gaining
entity
727-865 How other provisions of this Division apply to
support this Subdivision
727-870 Effect of CGT roll-over
727-875 Application to CGT asset that is also trading stock
or revenue asset
(1) If:
(a) as at the time when a *scheme is
entered into, or a later time, an entity (the prospective losing
entity) has *provided, is providing, is
to provide, or might provide, one or more economic benefits
*in connection with the scheme; and
(b) the prospective losing entity is a company or trust (except one listed
in section 727-125 (about superannuation entities)); and
(c) a *realisation event happens to an
*equity or loan interest, or to an
*indirect equity or loan interest, in the
prospective losing entity at a time when no
*IVS time for the scheme has yet happened
(whether or not one happens later); and
(d) apart from this Division, a loss would be
*realised for income tax purposes by the
realisation event; and
(e) because of section 727-855, the scheme results in a
*presumed indirect value shift affecting the
realisation event; and
(f) section 727-860 (about prospective gaining entities) is
satisfied; and
(g) no exclusion in Subdivision 727-C applies to the presumed
indirect value shift because of section 727-865; and
(h) on the assumptions set out in subsection 727-865(3), the interest
would be an *affected interest in the
prospective losing entity;
the loss is reduced by an amount that is reasonable having regard to a
reasonable estimate of the amount (if any) by which the scheme has reduced the
interest’s market value during the period that ends at the time of the
realisation event and started at the later of:
(i) when the scheme was entered into; and
(j) the time of the last realisation event that happened to the
interest.
Note 1: This Subdivision does not reduce gains from
realisation events, but loss reductions under this Subdivision are taken into
account in working out:
• gain reductions under Subdivision 727-G for
interests in a gaining entity that are realised after the IVS time for the
scheme (see section 727-625); or
• uplifts under Subdivision 727-H in the
adjustable values of interests in a gaining entity (see
section 727-810).
Note 2: Section 727-865 provides for how other
provisions of this Division apply for the purposes of this
Subdivision.
Further exclusion for certain 95% services indirect value
shifts
(2) The loss is not reduced if the
*presumed indirect value shift is a
*95% services indirect value shift because of
subsection 727-865(2), unless:
(a) the conditions in section 727-705 (as applying because of that
subsection) are met for the presumed indirect value shift; or
(b) the conditions in section 727-710, 727-715 or 727-720 (as
applying because of that subsection) are met for the presumed indirect value
shift and for the realisation event.
(1) The *scheme results in a
presumed indirect value shift affecting the
*realisation event if, and only if, as at the
time of the realisation event, it is reasonable to conclude that the total
market value of the economic benefits (the greater benefits)
that:
(a) the *prospective losing entity has
*provided, is providing, is to provide, or
might provide, *in connection with the
*scheme, to another entity, or to each of 2 or
more other entities; and
(b) can be identified (even if the other entity or entities cannot be
identified or are not all in existence, or the provision of some or all of the
economic benefits is contingent);
exceeds:
(c) the total market value of the economic benefits (the lesser
benefits) that:
(i) have been, are being, are to be, or might be, provided to the
prospective losing entity in connection with the scheme; and
(ii) can be identified (even if the entity or entities providing the
benefits cannot be identified or are not all in existence, or the provision of
some or all of the economic benefits is contingent); or
(d) if there are no economic benefits covered by
paragraph (c)—nil.
That excess is the amount of the presumed indirect value shift, which
happens at the time of the realisation event.
(2) The market value of an economic benefit is to be determined as at the
earliest time when it is reasonable to conclude that:
(a) the economic benefit can be identified; and
(b) paragraph 727-150(2)(b) is satisfied for that benefit;
if that time is before the *realisation
event.
(3) Otherwise, the market value of the economic benefit is to be
determined as at the time immediately before the
*realisation event, taking account of any
contingency to which provision of the benefit is subject at that time.
(4) An entity referred to in paragraph (1)(a) need not be a party to
the *scheme. A benefit can be provided by act
or omission.
(1) By the deadline set out in subsection (5), the conditions in
subsections (2) and (3) must be satisfied for at least one of these
entities:
(a) the entity or entities referred to in paragraph
727-855(1)(a);
(b) if at the time of the *realisation
event it is reasonable to conclude that the entity, or at least one of the
entities, referred to in paragraph 727-855(1)(a) will be one of 2 or more
entities, but it cannot be determined which—those 2 or more
entities.
(2) Enough must be known about the identity of an entity covered by
subsection (1) for it to be reasonable to conclude that, if:
(a) the *presumed indirect value shift
were an *indirect value shift resulting from
the *scheme; and
(b) the *IVS period for the scheme ended
at the time of the *realisation event;
and
(c) that entity were the *gaining entity
for the indirect value shift;
(d) the *prospective losing entity were
the *losing entity for the indirect value
shift; and
either or both of these would be satisfied for the indirect value
shift:
(e) section 727-105 (Ultimate controller test); and
(f) section 727-110 (Common-ownership nexus test).
(3) Enough must be known about the identity of the entity referred to in
subsection (2) for it also to be reasonable to conclude that, in relation
to either or both of the following:
(a) the *prospective losing entity
*providing one or more economic benefits to
that entity *in connection with the
*scheme; or
(b) that entity providing one or more economic benefits to the prospective
losing entity in connection with the scheme;
that entity and the prospective losing entity were not, are not, will not
be, or would not be, dealing with each other at
*arm’s length.
(4) Each entity that is covered by subsection (1), and for which
subsections (2) and (3) are satisfied, is called a prospective
gaining entity for the
*scheme.
(5) The deadline is:
(a) if the entity that owned the *equity
or loan interest immediately before the
*realisation event must lodge an
*income tax return for the income year in which
the event happens—the time by which the return must be lodged;
or
(b) otherwise—the end of the 6 months immediately after that income
year.
(1) To avoid doubt, these provisions apply for the purposes of working out
whether there has been a *presumed indirect
value shift and, if so, the amount of it:
(a) sections 727-155, 727-160 and 727-165 (about economic
benefits);
(b) section 727-315 (Transfer, for its adjustable value, of
depreciating asset acquired for less than $1,500,000).
(2) For the purposes of section 727-850, these provisions:
(a) Subdivision 727-C (Exclusions), except section 727-260
(about a shift down a wholly-owned chain of entities);
(b) sections 727-700 to 727-725 (about 95% services indirect value
shifts), except subsection 727-700(1);
apply to the *presumed indirect value
shift on the assumptions set out in subsection (3).
(3) The assumptions are:
(a) the *presumed indirect value shift is
an *indirect value shift resulting from the
*scheme; and
(b) the *prospective losing entity for
the scheme is the *losing entity for that
indirect value shift; and
(c) each *prospective gaining entity for
the scheme is the *gaining entity for that
indirect value shift; and
(d) the *greater benefits under the
presumed indirect value shift are the greater benefits under that indirect value
shift; and
(e) the *lesser benefits (if any) under
the presumed indirect value shift are the lesser benefits under that indirect
value shift; and
(f) the time of the realisation event mentioned in paragraph 727-850(1)(c)
is the *IVS time for the scheme; and
(g) the *IVS period for the scheme ends
at the time of the realisation event; and
(h) section 727-105 (Ultimate controller test) is satisfied for that
indirect value shift according to what it is reasonable to conclude under
subsection 727-860(2) as applying to the presumed indirect value shift;
and
(i) section 727-110 (Common-ownership nexus test) is satisfied for
that indirect value shift according to what it is reasonable to conclude under
subsection 727-860(2) as applying to the presumed indirect value shift;
and
(j) a reference to the realisation event mentioned in subsection
727-700(1) were a reference to the realisation event mentioned in paragraph
727-850(1)(c); and
(k) the interest to which the realisation event mentioned in paragraph
727-850(1)(c) happens were the interest referred to in paragraph 727-700(1)(a);
and
(l) a reference in any of sections 727-700 to 727-725 (about 95%
services indirect value shifts), except subsection 727-700(1), to the owner were
a reference to the entity that, at the time of the realisation event mentioned
in paragraph 727-850(1)(c), owns the interest to which the event
happens.
(4) Sections 727-635 and 727-640 affect how this Subdivision applies
to *equity or loan interests, and
*indirect equity or loan interests, in the
*prospective losing entity that are split or
merged during the period:
(a) starting when the *scheme is entered
into; and
(b) ending at the time of the
*realisation event mentioned in paragraph
727-850(1)(c);
in the same way as those sections affect how Subdivision 727-G would
apply to those interests on the assumptions set out in subsection (3) of
this section.
(5) The application of a provision because of this section is additional
to, and is not intended to limit, any other application of the
provision.
(1) If:
(a) the *realisation event mentioned in
paragraph 727-850(1)(c) is a *CGT event;
and
(b) section 727-850 reduces a loss that would, apart from this
Division, be *realised for income tax purposes
by the CGT event; and
(c) there is a roll-over for the CGT event;
the interest’s *reduced cost base at
the time of the CGT event is taken to have been reduced by the amount by which
section 727-850 reduces that loss, but is so taken only for the purposes of
working out:
(d) the interest’s reduced cost base, from time to time after the
roll-over, for the entity that *acquired the
interest because of the CGT event; and
(e) in the case of a *replacement-asset
roll-over—the reduced cost base of the replacement CGT asset, from time to
time after the roll-over, for the entity that
*disposed of the interest.
Note: Because of the roll-over, the loss reduction under
section 727-850 will have no tax effect. This subsection ensures that the
loss reduction is passed on, through the reduction in reduced cost base, to
prevent or reduce a loss arising on a later CGT event.
If an *equity or loan interest is also
an item of *trading stock or a
*revenue asset, this Subdivision applies to the
interest once in its character as a CGT asset and again in its character as
trading stock or a revenue asset.
727-905 How this Subdivision affects the rest of this
Division
727-910 Treatment of value shifted under the direct value
shift
(1) This Subdivision affects how the rest of this Division applies to a
*scheme (the IVS scheme) that is
or includes a scheme (the DVS scheme) under which there is a
*direct value shift.
(2) If the *direct value shift:
(a) has consequences under Division 725 for an entity as an
*affected owner of
*down interests (or would do so apart from
section 725-90 (about direct value shifts that will be reversed));
and
(b) also has consequences under that Division for another entity as an
affected owner of *up interests (or would do so
apart from section 725-90);
the rest of this Subdivision has effect, for the purposes of
Subdivisions 727-A to 727-K, in order to determine:
(c) whether the IVS scheme results in an
*indirect value shift, from the first entity to
the other entity, that has consequences under this Division; and
(d) whether the IVS scheme has consequences under Subdivision 727-K
because it results in a *presumed indirect
value shift affecting a *realisation event
happening to *equity or loan interests, or to
*indirect equity or loan interests, in the
first entity; and
(e) those consequences.
Note: Section 725-50 sets out when a direct value shift
has consequences under Division 725.
(3) If:
(a) the IVS scheme is the DVS scheme; and
(b) subsection 725-145(2) is satisfied for the
*direct value shift (because one or more equity
or loan interests in the target entity are issued at a discount); but
(c) subsection 725-145(3) (about an increase in the market value of one or
more equity or loan interests in the target entity) is not satisfied for the
direct value shift;
Subdivisions 727-A to 727-K apply to the IVS scheme only as provided
in this section.
(4) Otherwise, those Subdivisions apply to the IVS scheme as provided in
this section in addition to any other application they have to the
scheme.
(1) The first entity is treated as
*providing economic benefits to the other
entity, *in connection with the IVS scheme, at
the time of a decrease (or future decrease) in the market value of any of the
*down interests, to the extent that the
decrease is (or will be) covered by subsection 725-155(1).
(2) Despite subsections 727-150(4) and 727-855(2) and (3), the market
value of all economic benefits that subsection (1) of this section treats
the first entity as providing to the other entity:
(a) is to be determined as at the time immediately before the
*IVS time, or immediately before the
*realisation event, as appropriate;
and
(b) is equal to the total value shifted from the
*down interests to the
*up interests, as worked out under one or more
applications of step 2 of the method statement in section 725-365 or
725-380.
(3) The 2 entities are treated as not dealing with each other at
*arm’s length in relation to the
providing of those benefits.
(4) None of those benefits is treated as consisting of, or including,
services provided or a right to have services provided.
Note: This means that the exclusions in
Subdivisions 727-C and 727-G for indirect value shifts involving services
will not apply.
(5) Except as provided in this section, none of the following is treated
as the *providing of economic benefits
*in connection with the IVS scheme:
(a) a decrease (or future decrease) in the market value of
*down interests owned by the first entity or
the other entity, to the extent that the decrease is (or will be) covered by
subsection 725-155(1);
(b) an increase (or future increase) in the market value of
*up interests owned by the first entity or the
other entity, to the extent that the increase is (or will be) covered by
subsection 725-145(3);
(c) an issue of *up interests at a
*discount to the first entity or the other
entity, to the extent that the issue is (or will be) covered by subsection
725-145(2).
Note: Value shifted from down interests owned by the other
entity to up interests owned by the first entity are dealt with by a separate
application of this Subdivision to those interests (because of paragraphs
727-905(2)(a) and (b).
Part 2—Amendment
of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997
2 After Part 3-45
Insert:
(1) Division 723 applies to a realisation event happening on or after
1 July 2002 to:
(a) a CGT asset; or
(b) an item of trading stock;
(c) a revenue asset.
(2) Paragraph 723-10(1)(b) or 723-15(1)(b) applies to a right created on
or after 1 July 2002.
Division 725 applies to a scheme entered into on or after
1 July 2002. It also applies to a scheme entered into on or after
27 June 2002, but only if:
(a) the decrease times for down interests of which entities are affected
owners are all on or after 1 July 2002; and
(b) the increase times for up interests of which entities are affected
owners are all on or after 1 July 2002.
(1) Division 727 applies to a scheme entered into on or after
1 July 2002.
(2) It also applies to a scheme entered into on or after 27 June
2002, but only in relation to:
(a) an indirect value shift that happens under the scheme on or after
1 July 2002; or
(b) a presumed indirect value shift that happens under the scheme and
affects a realisation event that happens on or after 1 July 2002.
(3) Subsection (2) does not apply to an indirect value shift, or a
presumed indirect value shift, if:
(a) the economic benefits taken into account in determining that the
scheme has resulted in that indirect value shift or presumed indirect value
shift include economic benefits provided by:
(i) an act referred to in Division 138 of the Income Tax
Assessment Act 1997 as the trigger event; or
(ii) an event or act referred to in Division 139 of the Income Tax
Assessment Act 1997 as the trigger event; and
(b) the act was done, or the event happened, on or after 27 June 2002
and before 1 July 2002.
Note: In that case, the consequences of the trigger event
are worked out under Division 138 or 139 of the Income Tax Assessment
Act 1997: see items 13 and 14 of Schedule 15 to the New
Business Tax System (Consolidation, Value Shifting, Demergers and Other
Measures) Act 2002.
Part 3—Consequential
amendment of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997
3 Section 104-5 (table row relating to
event number G2)
Repeal the row.
4 Section 104-5 (after table row relating
to event number K7)
Insert:
|
K8 Direct value shifts affecting your equity or loan interests in a company
or trust [See section 104-240 and Division 725] |
the decrease time for the interests |
the gain worked out under section 725-365 |
no capital loss |
5 Section 104-140
Repeal the section.
6 After
section 104-235
Insert:
(1) CGT event K8 happens if there is a
*taxing event generating a gain for a
*down interest under
section 725-245.
Note: That section sets out some of the CGT consequences of
a direct value shift for affected owners of down interests. See also the rest of
Division 725.
(2) The time of the event is the
*decrease time for the
*down interest.
(3) You make a capital gain equal to the gain generated for
the taxing event.
Note: You cannot make a capital loss.
(4) If, because of the same *direct value
shift, there are 2 or more *taxing events
generating a gain that are covered by subsection (1), CGT event
K8 happens for each of those taxing events, and you make a separate
capital gain for each.
Exceptions
(5) A *capital gain is disregarded if the
*down interest is a
*pre-CGT asset.
7 Section 112-45 (table rows relating to
event number G2)
Repeal the rows.
8 Section 112-45 (after table row relating
to event number G3)
Insert:
|
K8 |
Direct value shifts affecting your equity or loan interests in a company or
trust |
The total cost base and reduced cost base |
Subdivision 725-D |
9 Division 138
Repeal the Division.
10 Division 139
Repeal the Division.
11 Division 140
Repeal the Division.
12 At the end of
section 170-270
Add:
(2) To avoid doubt, the amount of the
*capital loss, deduction, or partnership
deduction, referred to in this section is:
(a) the amount remaining after applying Division 723 or
section 727-615; or
(b) nil, if none of the amount remains after applying that section or
Division.
Note: Division 723 and section 727-615 reduce a
loss realised for income tax purposes by a realisation event happening to a
non-depreciating asset (in the case of Division 723) or an affected
interest in a losing entity under an indirect value shift (in the case of
section 727-615).
Division 2—Saving
and transitional provisions
13 Saving for former
Division 138
Despite the repeal by item 9, the repealed provisions continue to
apply to an act referred to in Division 138 of the Income Tax Assessment
Act 1997 as the trigger event, if the act was done:
(a) under a scheme entered into before 27 June 2002; or
(b) on or after 27 June 2002 and before 1 July 2002.
14 Saving for former
Division 139
Despite the repeal by item 10, the repealed provisions continue to
apply to an event or act referred to in Division 139 of the Income Tax
Assessment Act 1997 as the trigger event, if the event happened, or the act
was done:
(a) under a scheme entered into before 27 June 2002; or
(b) on or after 27 June 2002 and before 1 July 2002.
15 Saving for former provisions about direct
value shifts
Despite the repeal by item 11, the repealed provisions continue to
apply to a scheme, unless Division 725 of the Income Tax Assessment Act
1997 applies to the scheme.
Part 4—Consequential
amendment of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936
16 Paragraph 245-85(1)(b) in
Schedule 2C
After “forgiveness of the debt”, insert “(except a
reduction under Division 727 (indirect value shifting) of the Income Tax
Assessment Act 1997)”.
17 At the end of subsection 245-85(1) in
Schedule 2C
Add:
Note: Paragraph (1)(c) does not cover a reduction under
Division 727 (indirect value shifting) of the Income Tax Assessment Act
1997 because that Division is not in Part 3-1 or 3-3 of that
Act.
18 Section 245-250 in
Schedule 2C
Omit “section 138-25”, substitute “the definition of
under common ownership in subsection
995-1(1)”.
Income Tax Assessment Act
1997
19 After Division 975
Insert:
CGT assets
977-5 Realisation event
977-10 Loss realised for income tax
purposes
977-15 Gain realised for income tax
purposes
Trading stock
977-20 Realisation event
977-25 Disposal of trading stock: loss realised for income
tax purposes
977-30 Ending of an income year: loss realised for income
tax purposes
977-35 Disposal of trading stock: gain realised for income
tax purposes
977-40 Ending of an income year: gain realised for income
tax purposes
Revenue assets
977-50 Meaning of revenue
asset
977-55 Loss or gain realised for income tax purposes
For a *CGT asset, a realisation
event is a *CGT event (except CGT event
E4 and CGT event G1).
(1) A loss is realised for income tax
purposes by a
*realisation event that happens to a
*CGT asset if, and only if, an entity makes a
*capital loss from the event. That capital loss
is the loss realised by the event.
(2) If a provision of this Act reduces the loss that would, apart from
that provision, be *realised for income tax
purposes by the event, the *capital loss is
reduced by the same amount.
(1) A gain is realised for income tax
purposes by a
*realisation event that happens to a
*CGT asset if, and only if, an entity makes a
*capital gain from the event. That capital gain
is the gain that is realised by the event.
(2) If a provision of this Act reduces the gain that would, apart from
that provision, be *realised for income tax
purposes by the event, the *capital gain is
reduced by the same amount.
For an item of *trading stock, a
realisation event is a disposal of the item or the ending of an
income year.
(1) A loss is realised for income tax
purposes by a
*realisation event consisting of disposal of an
item of *trading stock if, and only
if:
(a) the item is disposed of, for less than its
*cost, in the same income year in which it
became part of the trading stock on hand of the entity disposing of it;
or
(b) the item is disposed of in a later income year for less than its
*value as trading stock of the entity on hand
at the start of the later income year.
(2) The loss that is realised for income tax purposes by the event is the
difference between the amount included in the entity’s assessable income
because of the disposal and:
(a) the amount that the entity can deduct for the item’s
*cost; or
(b) the item’s *value as
*trading stock on hand at the start of the
later income year;
as appropriate.
(3) If a provision of this Act reduces the loss that would, apart from
that provision, be *realised for income tax
purposes by the event:
(a) the amount that the entity can deduct for the item’s
*cost; or
(b) the item’s *value as trading
stock on hand at the start of the later income year;
as appropriate, is reduced by the same amount.
(1) A loss is realised for income tax
purposes by a
*realisation event that happens to an item of
*trading stock and consists of
the ending of an income year if, and only if, the
*value of the item, as trading stock of an
entity on hand at the end of that income year, is less than:
(a) its *cost, if it became part of the
trading stock on hand of the entity during that income year; or
(b) otherwise, its value as trading stock of the entity on hand at the
start of that income year.
(2) The loss that is realised for income tax purposes by the event is the
difference between the *value of the item, as
*trading stock of the entity on hand at the end
of that income year and:
(a) the amount that the entity can deduct for the item’s
*cost; or
(b) the item’s *value as trading
stock on hand at the start of the income year;
as appropriate.
(3) If a provision of this Act reduces the loss that would, apart from
that provision, be *realised for income tax
purposes by the event:
(a) the amount that the entity can deduct for the item’s
*cost; or
(b) the item’s *value as
*trading stock on hand at the start of the
income year;
as appropriate, is reduced by the same amount.
(1) A gain is realised for income tax purposes by a
*realisation event consisting of disposal of an
item of *trading stock if, and only
if:
(a) the item is disposed of, for more than its
*cost, in the same income year in which it
became part of the trading stock on hand of the entity disposing of it;
or
(b) the item is disposed of in a later income year for more than its
*value as trading stock of the entity on hand
at the start of the later income year.
(2) The gain that is realised for income tax purposes by the event is the
difference between the amount included in the entity’s assessable income
because of the disposal and:
(a) the amount that the entity can deduct for the item’s
*cost; or
(b) the item’s *value as trading
stock on hand at the start of the later income year;
as appropriate.
(3) If a provision of this Act reduces the gain that would, apart from
that provision, be *realised for income tax
purposes by the event, the amount that is included in the assessable income of
the entity because of the disposal is reduced by the same amount.
(1) A gain is realised for income tax purposes by a
*realisation event that happens to an item of
*trading stock and consists of
the ending of an income year if, and only if, the
*value of the item, as trading stock of an
entity on hand at the end of that income year, is greater than:
(a) its *cost, if it became part of the
trading stock on hand of the entity during that income year; or
(b) otherwise, its value as trading stock of the entity on hand at the
start of that income year.
(2) The gain that is realised for income tax purposes by the event is the
difference between the *value of the item, as
*trading stock of the entity on hand at the end
of that income year and:
(a) the amount that the entity can deduct for the item’s
*cost; or
(b) the item’s *value as trading
stock on hand at the start of the income year;
as appropriate.
(3) If a provision of this Act reduces the gain that would, apart from
that provision, be *realised for income tax
purposes by the event:
(a) the amount that the entity can deduct for the item’s
*cost; or
(b) the item’s *value as
*trading stock on hand at the start of the
income year;
as appropriate, is increased by the same amount.
[The next section is section 977-50.]
A *CGT asset is a revenue
asset if, and only if:
(a) the profit or loss on your disposing of the asset, ceasing to own it,
or otherwise realising it, would be taken into account, in calculating your
assessable income or *tax loss, otherwise than
as a *capital gain or
*capital loss; and
(b) the asset is neither *trading stock
nor a *depreciating asset.
For a *revenue asset:
(a) disposing of, ceasing to own, or otherwise realising, the asset is a
realisation event; and
(b) a loss is realised for income tax
purposes by the
*realisation event if, and only if, there is a
loss on the event; and
(c) a gain is realised for income tax
purposes by the realisation event if,
and only if, there is a profit on the event; and
(d) the loss or profit on the event is the loss or gain realised for
income tax purposes; and
(e) if a provision of this Act reduces the loss or gain that would, apart
from that provision, be realised for income tax purposes by the event, the loss
or profit to be taken into account in calculating your assessable income or
*tax loss is reduced by the same
amount.
20 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
95% services indirect value shift has the meaning given by
section 727-700.
21 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
active participant:
(a) in a *scheme under which there is a
*direct value shift, has the meaning given by
subsection 725-65(2); and
(b) in a *scheme under which there is an
*indirect value shift, has the meaning given by
subsection 727-530(3).
22 Subsection 995-1(1) (definition of
adjustable value)
Repeal the definition, substitute:
adjustable value:
(a) of a *depreciating asset, has the
meaning given by section 40-85; and
(b) of an *equity or loan
interest:
(i) for the purposes of determining the consequences of a
*direct value shift—has the meaning given
by sections 725-240, 725-315 and 725-325; and
(ii) for the purposes of determining the consequences of an
*indirect value shift—has the meaning
given by sections 727-830, 727-835 and 727-840.
23 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
adjustable value method means the method (for determining the
effect of *indirect value shifts) for which
Subdivision 727-H provides.
24 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
affected interest:
(a) in the *losing entity for an
*indirect value shift, has the meaning given by
section 727-460; or
(b) in the *gaining entity for an
indirect value shift, has the meaning given by section 727-465.
25 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
affected owner:
(a) of *down interests, has the meaning
given by section 725-80; and
(b) of *up interests, has the meaning
given by section 725-85; and
(c) for an *indirect value shift, has the
meaning given by section 727-530.
26 Subsection 995-1(1) (definition of
associate-inclusive control interest)
Repeal the definition.
27 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
common ownership: see under common
ownership.
28 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
common-ownership nexus: see section 727-400.
29 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
control (for value shifting purposes) has the meaning given
by sections 727-355, 727-360, 727-365 and 727-375.
30 Subsection 995-1(1) (definition of
decreased value shares)
Repeal the definition.
31 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
decrease time for a *direct
value shift has the meaning given by section 725-155.
32 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
direct value shift has the meaning given by
section 725-145.
33 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
direct roll-over replacement has the meaning given by
section 723-110.
34 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
disaggregated attributable decrease: section 727-775
sets out how to determine whether an *indirect
value shift has produced a disaggregated attributable decrease in
the market value of an *equity or loan
interest.
35 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
disaggregated attributable increase: section 727-805
sets out how to determine whether an *indirect
value shift has produced a disaggregated attributable increase in
the market value of an *equity or loan
interest.
36 Subsection 995-1(1) (definition of
discount)
Repeal the definition, substitute:
discount: an *equity or loan
interest is issued at a discount as provided in
section 725-150.
37 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
down interest has the meaning given by
section 725-155.
38 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
equity or loan interest has the meaning given by
section 727-520.
39 Subsection 995-1(1) (definition of fixed
entitlement)
Repeal the definition, substitute:
fixed entitlement: an entity has a fixed entitlement
to a share of the income or capital of a trust if the entity has a fixed
entitlement to that share within the meaning of Division 272 in
Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.
40 Subsection 995-1(1) (definition of fixed
trust)
Repeal the definition, substitute:
fixed trust: a trust is a fixed trust if
entities have *fixed entitlements to all of the
income and capital of the trust.
41 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
gaining entity for an
*indirect value shift has the meaning given by
section 727-150.
42 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
greater benefits:
(a) under an *indirect value shift, has
the meaning given by subsection 727-150(3); and
(b) under a *presumed indirect value
shift, has the meaning given by subsection 727-855(1).
43 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
in connection with: an economic benefit is
*provided in connection with a
*scheme if at least one of the tests in
section 727-160 is satisfied.
44 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
increase time for a *direct
value shift has the meaning given by section 725-155.
45 Subsection 995-1(1) (definition of
increased value shares)
Repeal the definition.
46 Subsection 995-1(1) (definition of indexed
common ownership market value)
Repeal the definition.
47 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
indirect equity or loan interest has the meaning given by
section 727-525.
48 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
indirect primary equity interest has the meaning given by
section 727-220.
49 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
indirect roll-over replacement has the meaning given by
section 723-110.
50 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
indirect value shift has the meaning given by
Subdivision 727-B.
51 Subsection 995-1(1) (definition of
indirectly)
Omit “persons” (twice occurring), substitute
“entities”.
52 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
intermediate controller has the meaning given by subsection
727-530(2).
53 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
IVS period has the meaning given by
section 727-150.
54 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
IVS time has the meaning given by
section 727-150.
55 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
lesser benefits:
(a) under an *indirect value shift, has
the meaning given by paragraph 727-150(3)(a); and
(b) under a *presumed indirect value
shift, has the meaning given by paragraph 727-855(1)(c).
56 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
losing entity for an
*indirect value shift has the meaning given by
section 727-150.
57 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
loss-focussed basis has the meaning given by
section 727-780.
58 Subsection 995-1(1) (at the end of the
definition of market value)
Add:
To avoid doubt, paragraph (a) does apply in working out the market
value of economic benefits, or of an *equity or
loan interest, for the purposes of Part 3-95 (Value shifting).
59 Subsection 995-1(1) (definition of
material decrease)
Repeal the definition.
60 Subsection 995-1(1) (definition of
material increase)
Repeal the definition.
61 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
non-complying approved deposit fund means a non-complying ADF
as defined by subsection 267(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act
1936.
62 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
non-fixed trust means a trust that is not a
*fixed trust.
63 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
post-CGT asset means a *CGT
asset that is not a *pre-CGT asset.
64 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
predominantly-services indirect value shift has the meaning
given by section 727-725.
65 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
pre-shift gain has the meaning given by
section 725-210.
66 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
pre-shift loss has the meaning given by
section 725-210.
67 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
presumed indirect value shift has the meaning given by
section 727-855.
68 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
primary equity interest in an entity has the meaning given by
section 727-520.
69 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
primary interest in an entity has the meaning given by
section 727-520.
70 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
primary loan interest in an entity has the meaning given by
section 727-520.
71 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
prospective gaining entity for a
*scheme has the meaning given by
section 727-860.
72 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
prospective losing entity for a
*scheme has the meaning given by
section 727-850.
73 Subsection 995-1(1) (definition of
provide)
After “*fringe benefit”,
insert “or economic benefit”.
74 Subsection 995-1(1) (definition of
residual value)
Repeal the definition.
75 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
realisation event has the meaning given by
sections 977-5, 977-20 and 977-55.
76 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
realisation-time method means the method (for determining the
effect of *indirect value shifts) for which
Subdivision 727-G provides.
77 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
realised for income tax purposes:
(a) a gain is realised for income tax purposes as provided
in sections 977-15, 977-35, 977-40 and 977-55; and
(b) a loss is realised for income tax purposes as provided
in sections 977-10, 977-25, 977-30 and 977-55.
78 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
revenue asset has the meaning given by
section 977-50.
79 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
secondary equity interest has the meaning given by
section 727-520.
80 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
scheme period for a *direct
value shift has the meaning given by section 725-55.
81 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
secondary interest has the meaning given by
section 727-520.
82 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
secondary loan interest has the meaning given by
section 727-520.
83 Subsection 995-1(1) (definition of share
value shift)
Repeal the definition.
84 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
taxing event generating a gain has the meaning given by
sections 725-245 and 725-335.
85 Subsection 995-1(1) (definition of total
share value increase)
Repeal the definition.
86 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
ultimate controller has the meaning given by
section 727-350.
87 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
ultimate stake of a particular percentage has the meaning
given by sections 727-405, 727-410 and 727-415.
88 Subsection 995-1(1) (definition of under
common ownership)
Repeal the definition, substitute:
under common ownership: 2 companies are under common
ownership if, and only if:
(a) they are members of the same
*wholly-owned group; or
(b) after tracing the direct and indirect ownership of the
*shares in each of the companies (through any
interposed companies and trusts) to the individuals who ultimately hold it, that
ownership is held by the same individuals in the same proportions.
In doing the tracing, ignore *shares whose
*dividends can reasonably be regarded as being
equivalent to the payment of interest on a loan having regard to:
(c) how the dividends are calculated; and
(d) the conditions applying to the payment of the dividends; and
(e) any other relevant matters.
89 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
up interest has the meaning given by
section 725-155.
Income Tax Assessment Act
1997
1 After Division 124
Insert:
Table of Subdivisions
Guide to Division 125
125-A Object of this Division
125-B Consequences for owners of interests
125-C Consequences for members of demerger group
125-D Corporate unit trusts and public trading trusts
Entities can obtain CGT relief for a demerger.
Owners of ownership interests in the head entity of a demerger group can
obtain a roll-over to defer CGT consequences for the CGT events that happen to
their interests under the demerger (see Subdivision 125-B).
Capital gains and capital losses made by members of the demerger group from
certain CGT events that happen under the demerger are disregarded (see
Subdivision 125-C).
Note: Dividend relief is also available: see section 44
of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.
Table of sections
125-5 Object of this Division
The object of this Division is to facilitate the demerging of entities by
ensuring that capital gains tax considerations are not an impediment to
restructuring a *business.
You can choose to obtain a roll-over if a CGT event happens to your
interests in a company or trust because of a demerger of an entity from the
group of which the company or trust is the head entity.
There are cost base adjustments if you receive new interests under a
demerger and no CGT event happens to your original interests.
Table of sections
Operative provisions
125-55 When a roll-over is available for a
demerger
125-60 Meaning of ownership interest and
related terms
125-65 Meanings of demerger group, head
entity and demerger subsidiary
125-70 Meanings of demerger, demerged
entity and demerging entity
125-75 Exception: employee share schemes
125-80 What is the roll-over?
125-85 Cost base adjustments where CGT event happens but no
roll-over chosen
125-90 Cost base adjustments where no CGT
event
125-95 No other cost base adjustment after
demerger
125-100 No further demerger relief in some
cases
[This is the end of the Guide.]
(1) You can choose to obtain a roll-over if:
(a) you own an *ownership interest in a
company or trust (your original interest); and
(b) the company or trust is the *head
entity of a *demerger group; and
(c) a *demerger happens to the demerger
group; and
(d) under the demerger, a *CGT event
happens to your original interest and you
*acquire a new or replacement interest (your
new interest) in the *demerged
entity.
Note 1: Section 125-80 sets out what the roll-over
is.
Note 2: You have to make cost base adjustments even if there
is no CGT event: see section 125-90.
Example: Peter owns shares (his original interests) in
Company A, a public company. Company B is a wholly owned subsidiary of Company
A. Company A announces a demerger utilising a proportionate capital reduction
and the disposal of all its shares in Company B to its 320,000 shareholders.
Following the demerger all of the shareholders in Company A, including Peter,
will own all of the shares in Company B (their new interests).
(2) You cannot choose to obtain a roll-over under this Subdivision for an
original interest if:
(a) you are a foreign resident; and
(b) the new interest you *acquire under
the *demerger in exchange for that original
interest does not have the *necessary
connection with Australia just after you acquire it.
Note: Section 136-25 tells you when an asset has the
necessary connection with Australia.
(3) You cannot choose to obtain a roll-over under this Subdivision for a
*CGT event happening if you can obtain a
roll-over under some other provision of this Act for all of the CGT events that
happened to your original interests under the
*demerger.
Note: You might be able to obtain a roll-over for the CGT
events under Subdivision 124-E, 124-G, 124-H or 124-M.
(1) An ownership interest in a company or trust
is:
(a) for a company, a *share in the
company or an option, right or similar interest issued by the company that gives
the owner an entitlement to *acquire a share in
the company; and
(b) for a trust, a unit or other interest in the trust or an option, right
or similar interest issued by the trustee that gives the owner an entitlement to
acquire a unit or other interest in the trust.
(2) However, this Subdivision applies to a
*dual listed company voting share in a company
as if it were not an ownership interest if there are not more than
5 of those *shares in the company.
(3) A dual listed company voting share is a
*share in a company:
(a) issued:
(i) in the *head entity of a
*demerger group; and
(ii) as part of a *dual listed company
arrangement; and
(iii) mainly for the purpose of ensuring that shareholders of both
companies involved in the arrangement vote as a single decision-making body on
matters affecting them; and
(b) that does not carry rights to financial entitlements (except the
return of the amount paid up on the share and a dividend that is the equivalent
of a dividend paid on an ordinary share).
(4) A dual listed company arrangement is an
*arrangement under which 2 publicly listed
companies, while maintaining their separate legal entity status, shareholdings
and listings, align their strategic directions and the economic interests of
their respective shareholders through:
(a) the appointment of common (or almost identical) boards of directors;
and
(b) management of the operations of the 2 companies on a unified basis;
and
(c) the shareholders of both companies voting in effect as a single
decision-making body on substantial issues affecting their combined interests;
and
(d) equalised distributions to shareholders in accordance with an
equalisation ratio applying between the 2 companies, both generally and in the
event of a winding up of one or both of the companies; and
(e) cross-guarantees as to, or similar financial support for, each
other’s substantial obligations or operations, except where the effect of
the relevant regulatory requirements prevents those guarantees or that financial
support.
(5) However, an arrangement is not a dual listed company
arrangement unless one but not both of the companies is an Australian
resident.
(1) A demerger group comprises the
*head entity of the group and one or more
*demerger subsidiaries.
(2) A trust cannot be a member of a demerger group unless
*CGT event E4 is capable of applying to all of
the units and interests in the trust.
Note: A discretionary trust cannot be a member of a demerger
group.
(3) A company or trust is the head entity of a
*demerger group if no other member of the group
owns *ownership interests in the company or
trust.
(4) If apart from this subsection, a company or trust would be the
*head entity of a
*demerger group and the company or trust, and
all of its *demerger subsidiaries, are also
demerger subsidiaries of another company or trust in another demerger group, the
first-mentioned company or trust is not the head entity of a
demerger group.
(5) A company is a demerger subsidiary of another company or
a trust that is a member of a *demerger group
if the other company or the trust, either alone or together with other members
of the group, owns, or has the right to
*acquire,
*ownership interests in the company that carry
between them:
(a) the right to receive more than 20% of any distribution of income or
capital by the company; or
(b) the right to exercise, or control the exercise of, more than 20% of
the voting power of the company.
(6) A trust is a demerger subsidiary of another trust or a
company that is a member of a *demerger group
if the other trust or the company, either alone or together with other members
of the group, owns, or has the right to
*acquire,
*ownership interests in the trust that carry
between them the right to receive more than 20% of any distribution of income or
capital by the trustee.
(1) A demerger happens to a
*demerger group if:
(a) there is a restructuring of the demerger group; and
(b) under the restructuring:
(i) members of the demerger group
*dispose of at least 80% of their total
*ownership interests (taking into account the
number, nature and value of those interests) in another member of the demerger
group to owners of original interests in the
*head entity of the demerger group;
or
(ii) at least 80% of the total ownership interests (taking into account
the number, nature and value of those interests) of members of the demerger
group in another member of the demerger group end and new interests are issued
to owners of original interests in the head entity; or
(iii) some combination of the results in subparagraphs (i) and (ii)
happens with the effect that members of the demerger group stop owning at least
80% of their total ownership interests in another member of the group;
and
Note: CGT event C2 and CGT event C3 are the only relevant
CGT events in a subparagraph (ii) case.
(c) under the restructuring:
(i) a *CGT event happens to an original
interest owned by an entity in the head entity of the group and the entity
*acquires a new interest; or
(ii) no CGT event happens to an original interest owned by an entity in
the head entity of the group and the entity acquires a new interest;
and
(d) the acquisition by entities of new interests happens only because
those entities own or owned original interests; and
(e) the new interests acquired are:
(i) if the head entity is a company—ownership interests in a
company; or
(ii) if the head entity is a trust—ownership interests in a trust;
and
(f) just before the restructuring, more than 50% of original interests in
the head entity of the demerger group (taking into account their number, nature
and value) are owned by:
(i) Australian residents; or
(ii) foreign residents whose new interests have the
*necessary connection with Australia just after
they acquire them; and
(g) neither the original interests nor the new interests are in a trust
that is a *superannuation fund; and
(h) the requirements of subsections (2) and (3) are met.
Example: To continue the example from subsection 125-55(1),
Peter owns 400 post-CGT shares in Company A. Companies A and B are both members
of a demerger group. Company A is the head entity of the demerger group and
Company B is a demerger subsidiary.
Company A proceeds to demerge 100% of its shares in Company
B to its shareholders.
Company A enters into a proportionate capital reduction,
returning 40 cents per share to its ordinary shareholders. Peter is entitled to
$160 (40c times 400 shares) under the capital reduction.
For Peter, the capital reduction amount of $160 is
compulsorily applied to acquire Company A’s shares in Company B, at $6.75
(a discount of 10% to current market value). Company A rounds up the fractional
amounts in calculating the number of whole shares to be distributed to each
shareholder. This gives Peter 24 shares in Company B (160 divided by 6.75,
rounded up to the nearest whole number).
(2) Each owner (an original owner) of original interests in
the *head entity of the
*demerger group must, under the
*demerger,
*acquire the same proportion, or as nearly as
practicable the same proportion, of *ownership
interests that the *demerging entity or
entities owned in the *demerged entity as the
original owner owned in the head entity just before the demerger.
Note 1: There is an exception: see
section 125-75.
Note 2: Dual listed company voting shares are not treated as
ownership interests: see section 125-60.
Note 3: Fractional interests will generally not affect your
ability to choose a roll-over.
(3) The total *market value of the
*ownership interests each original owner owns
in the *demerged entity and
*head entity just after the
*demerger must be, or must reasonably have been
expected to be, not less than the total market value of the ownership interests
that owner owned in the head entity just before the demerger.
To continue the example from subsection (1), Company A
concludes, given the circumstances of the demerger, that the market values of
Peter’s and the other shareholders’ shares in A and B are expected
to be greater than their original interests in Company A, and advises the
shareholders of this position.
(4) In working out whether an original owner complies with
subsections (2) and (3):
(a) disregard *ownership interests that
are original interests the owner owns in the
*demerged entity; and
(b) an anticipated reasonable approximation of the
*market value of ownership interests is
sufficient.
Note: An anticipated reasonable approximation of market
values of ownership interests may include:
• valuations provided to shareholders in scheme
documents;
• the price selected for use under a sale
facility.
Exception: off-market buy-backs
(5) A buy-back of *shares that is an
off-market purchase for the purposes of Division 16K of Part III of
the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 is not a
*demerger.
Meaning of demerged entity
(6) An entity that is a former member of a
*demerger group is a demerged
entity if, under a *demerger that
happens to the group, *ownership interests in
the entity are acquired by:
(a) shareholders in the *head entity of
the group; or
(b) unitholders or holders of interests in the head entity of the
group.
Meaning of demerging entity
(7) An entity that is a member of a
*demerger group just before the
*CGT event referred to in section 125-155
happens is a demerging entity if, under a
*demerger that happens to the group, the entity
(either alone or together with other members of the demerger group):
(a) *dispose of at least 80% of their
total *ownership interests (taking into account
the number, nature and value of those interests) in another member of the
demerger group to owners of original interests in the
*head entity of the demerger group;
or
(b) at least 80% of the total ownership interests (taking into account the
number, nature and value of those interests) of that entity and of other members
of the demerger group in another member of the demerger group end and new
interests are issued to owners of original interests in the head entity;
or
Note: CGT event C2 and CGT event C3 are the only relevant
CGT events.
(c) some combination of the results in paragraphs (a) and (b) happens
with the effect that members of the demerger group stop owning at least 80% of
their total ownership interests in another member of the group.
(1) In working out whether the requirement in subsection 125-70(2) is met,
disregard each of the *ownership interests
described in subsections (2) and (3) if, just before the
*demerger, those interests (taking into account
their number, nature and value) represented not more than 3% of the total
*ownership interests in the entity.
(2) An *ownership interest in a company
that is owned by an entity is disregarded under subsection (1) if the
ownership interest:
(a) is a *qualifying share or a
*qualifying right
*acquired under an
*employee share scheme; and
(b) is not a fully-paid ordinary share.
(3) An *ownership interest in a trust
that is owned by an entity is disregarded under subsection (1) if the
ownership interest:
(a) would be a *qualifying share or a
*qualifying right
*acquired under an
*employee share scheme if Division 13A of
Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applied to ownership
interests in a trust; and
(b) is not a fully-paid unit.
(1) If you choose the roll-over, a
*capital gain or
*capital loss you make from a
*CGT event happening under the
*demerger to an original interest you own is
disregarded.
(2) If you choose the roll-over, the first element of the
*cost base and
*reduced cost base of:
(a) each new interest that you are not taken to have
*acquired before 20 September 1985;
and
(b) if not all of your original interests ended under the
*demerger—each of your remaining original
interests that you acquired on or after 20 September 1985;
is such proportion of the sum of the cost bases of all your original
interests that you acquired on or after 20 September 1985 (worked out just
before the demerger) as is reasonable having regard to the matters specified in
subsection (3).
Note: These rules replace the cost base and reduced cost
base adjustments in CGT event E4 and CGT event G1.
(3) The matters are:
(a) the *market values of your remaining
original interests just after the *demerger, or
an anticipated reasonable approximation of those market values; and
(b) the market values of your new interests just after the demerger, or an
anticipated reasonable approximation of those market values.
Example: To continue the example from subsection 125-70(3),
Company A advises its shareholders that Company B at that time represents 5% of
the market value of the group as a whole. Peter’s cost base for each of
his shares in A is $4.60, and Peter recalculates his cost base as
follows:![]()
to be spread over
400 shares in A and 24 shares in B.![]()
![]()
![]()
![]()
Pre-CGT interests
(4) The following subsections apply if you choose the roll-over and you
*acquired some or all of your original
interests before 20 September 1985.
(5) If you *acquired all of your original
interests before 20 September 1985, you are taken to have acquired all of
your new interests before that day.
(6) If you *acquired some of your
original interests before 20 September 1985, you are taken to have acquired
a reasonable whole number of your new interests before that day having regard
to:
(a) the *market values of your original
interests and your remaining original interests just after the
*demerger, or a reasonable approximation of
those market values; and
(b) the market values of your new interests just after the demerger, or a
reasonable approximation of those market values.
(7) If a proportion, but not all of, your original interests ends under
the *demerger and you
*acquired some of your original interests
before 20 September 1985, that same proportion of those interests you
acquired before that day ends.
Note: CGT event K6 may be relevant if you later dispose your
interests that are treated as being pre-CGT.
Example: Bert owned 100 shares in a company of which 50 were
acquired pre-CGT. Under a demerger 20 of Bert’s 100 shares were cancelled
in exchange for new interests. As 20% of his shares were cancelled, 10 of his
pre-CGT shares are taken to have been cancelled.
(1) You must adjust the *cost base and
*reduced cost base of an
*ownership interest you own in a company or
trust if:
(a) a *demerger happens to a
*demerger group of which the company or trust
is a member; and
(b) you owned an original interest in the
*head entity of the demerger group just before
the demerger; and
(c) a *CGT event happens to the original
interest and you *acquire a new interest under
the demerger; and
(d) you do not choose a roll-over under this Subdivision for the original
interest.
(2) The adjustments you must make are the same as the adjustments you
would have to make under section 125-80 for the
*cost bases and
*reduced cost bases of the remaining original
interests just after the *CGT event if you
could have chosen a roll-over under this Subdivision for the
*demerger and you had done so.
(1) You must adjust the *cost base and
*reduced cost base of an
*ownership interest you own in a company or
trust if:
(a) a *demerger happens to a
*demerger group of which the company or trust
is a member; and
(b) you owned an original interest in the
*head entity of the demerger group just before
the demerger; and
(c) no *CGT event happens to the original
interest, but you *acquire a new interest under
the demerger.
(2) The adjustments you must make are the same as the adjustments you
would have to make under section 125-80 if you could have chosen a
roll-over under this Subdivision for the
*demerger and you had done so.
If you have to make adjustments to the
*cost base and
*reduced cost base of your
*ownership interests under section 125-80,
125-85 or 125-90 because of a *demerger, no
other adjustment can be made under this Act to those cost bases and reduced cost
bases because of something that happens under the demerger.
Note: Those sections deal with any value shift that might
occur under the demerger and avoid the need for the general value shifting
regime to apply.
This Division does not apply to the remaining
*ownership interests in a
*demerged entity if one or more members of the
*demerger group
*disposed of or cancelled less than 100% of the
total ownership interests of that group in the demerged entity.
Note: After the demerger, a former member of the demerger
group can undertake a further demerger to which this Division can
apply.
Certain capital gains and capital losses that members of a demerger group
make under a demerger are disregarded.
Certain capital losses made under a demerger are reduced where the demerger
results in a value shift.
Table of sections
Operative provisions
125-155 Certain capital gains or losses disregarded for
demerging entity
125-160 No CGT event J1
125-165 Adjusted capital loss for value shift under a
demerger
125-170 Reduced cost base reduction if demerger asset
subject to roll-over
[This is the end of the Guide.]
Any *capital gain or
*capital loss a
*demerging entity makes from
*CGT event A1,
*CGT event C2,
*CGT event C3 or
*CGT event K6 happening to its
*ownership interests in a
*demerged entity under a
*demerger is disregarded.
Note 1: The full list of CGT events is in
section 104-5.
Note 2: This section will not apply if section 125-100
applies.
*CGT event J1 does not happen to a
*demerged entity or a member of a
*demerger group under a
*demerger if
*CGT event A1 or
*CGT event C2 happens to a
*demerging entity under the demerger.
A *capital loss made by an entity that
was a member of a *demerger group from a
*CGT event happening to a
*CGT asset under a
*demerger is reduced to the extent that the
capital loss is reasonably attributable to a reduction in the
*market value of the asset because of the
demerger.
Example: The market value of equity or loan interests in the
demerging entity may be reduced by the disposal, for inadequate value, of
ownership interests of another member of the demerger group to owners of
original interests in the head entity of the group.
(1) The *reduced cost base of a
*CGT asset is reduced if:
(a) the *market value of the asset is
reduced because of a *demerger; and
(b) after the demerger the asset is
*acquired by an entity from another entity (the
transferor) in a situation where the transferor obtained a
roll-over for the disposal; and
(c) the reduction occurred when the transferor owned the asset.
(2) The *reduced cost base of the asset
as determined under the roll-over is reduced just after the roll-over to the
extent of the reduction in *market value caused
by the *demerger.
Note: The rules in section 125-165 and this section
deal with any value shift that might occur under the demerger and avoid the need
for the general value shifting regime to apply.
This Division applies to corporate unit trusts and public trading trusts as
if they were companies.
Table of sections
Operative provisions
125-230 Application of Division to corporate unit trusts and
public trading trusts
[This is the end of the Guide.]
This Division applies to a trust to which section 102K or 102S of
the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies for an income year in which a
*demerger happens as if:
(a) the trust were a company; and
(b) *ownership interests in it were
interests in a company.
Income Tax Assessment Act
1936
2 Subsection 6(1)
Insert:
demerged entity has the meaning given by section 125-70
of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997.
3 Subsection 6(1)
Insert:
demerger has the meaning given by section 125-70 of the
Income Tax Assessment Act 1997.
4 Subsection 6(1)
Insert:
demerger dividend means:
(a) the total market value of ownership interests issued by the demerged
entity in itself under a demerger to the owners of ownership interests in the
head entity of the demerger group; or
(b) the total market value of ownership interests disposed of by a member
of a demerger group under a demerger to the owners of ownership interests in the
head entity; or
(c) the total of both of those market values;
and includes any part of the distribution that is a dividend assessable
under subsection 44(1).
5 Subsection 6(1)
Insert:
demerger group has the meaning given by section 125-65
of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997.
6 Subsection 6(1)
Insert:
demerger subsidiary has the meaning given by
section 125-65 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997.
7 Subsection 6(1)
Insert:
demerging entity has the meaning given by section 125-70
of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997.
8 Subsection 6(1)
Insert:
head entity of a demerger group has the meaning given by
section 125-65 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997.
9 Subsection 6(1)
Insert:
ownership interest has the meaning given by
section 125-60 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997.
10 At the end of
section 44
Add:
(2) Subsections (3) and (4) apply to a demerger dividend unless,
before the demerger, the demerging entity elects in writing that those
subsections do not apply to the total value of the distribution for all
shareholders.
(3) This section applies to the demerger dividend as if it had not been
paid out of profits.
(4) A demerger dividend is not assessable income or exempt
income.
(5) However, subsections (3) and (4) do not apply to a demerger
dividend unless, just after the demerger, CGT assets owned by the demerged
entity or a demerger subsidiary representing at least 50% by market value of all
the CGT assets (or a reasonable approximation of market value) owned by the
demerged entity and its subsidiaries are used, directly or indirectly, in one or
more businesses carried on by one or more of those entities.
(6) In applying subsection (5), disregard any assets that are
ownership interests in a demerger subsidiary unless they are used in a business
referred to in that subsection.
11 Section 45B
Repeal the section, substitute:
Purpose of section
(1) The purpose of this section is to ensure that:
(a) certain payments that are paid in order to obtain non-assessable
dividends; and
(b) certain payments that are paid in substitution for
dividends;
are treated as dividends for taxation purposes.
Application of section
(2) This section applies if:
(a) there is a scheme under which a person is provided with a demerger
benefit or a capital benefit by a company; and
(b) under the scheme, a taxpayer (the relevant taxpayer),
who may or may not be the person provided with the demerger benefit or the
capital benefit, obtains a tax benefit; and
(c) having regard to the relevant circumstances of the scheme, it would be
concluded that the person, or one of the persons, who entered into or carried
out the scheme or any part of the scheme did so for a purpose (whether or not
the dominant purpose but not including an incidental purpose) of enabling a
taxpayer (the relevant taxpayer) to obtain a tax
benefit.
Commissioner to determine that section 45C applies
(3) The Commissioner may make, in writing, a determination that:
(a) section 45BA applies in relation to the whole, or a part, of the
demerger benefit; or
(b) section 45C applies in relation to the whole, or a part, of the
capital benefit.
A determination does not form part of an assessment.
Note: If section 45BA applies in relation to the whole,
or a part, of a demerger benefit, this benefit may be a capital
benefit.
Meaning of provided with a demerger benefit
(4) A person is provided with a demerger benefit if in
relation to a demerger:
(a) a company distributes money or property to the person and the
distribution is not included in the person’s assessable income as a
dividend under section 44; or
(b) a company provides the person with ownership interests in that or
another company and the value of the ownership interests is not included in the
assessable income of that or another person; or
(c) something is done in relation to an ownership interest owned by the
person that has the effect of increasing the value of an ownership interest
(which may or may not be the same ownership interest) owned by the person, and
that increase in value is not included in the assessable income of that or
another person.
Meaning of provided with a capital benefit
(5) A reference to a person being provided with a capital
benefit is a reference to any of the following:
(a) the provision of ownership interests in a company to the
person;
(b) the distribution to the person of share capital or share
premium;
(c) something that is done in relation to an ownership interest that has
the effect of increasing the value of an ownership interest (which may or may
not be the same interest) that is held by the person.
(6) However, a person is not provided with a capital benefit
to the extent that the provision of interests, the distribution or the thing
done referred to in subsection (5) involves the person receiving a demerger
dividend.
(7) For the purposes of this section, a non-share distribution to an
equity holder is taken to be the distribution to the equity holder of share
capital to the extent to which it is a non-share capital return.
Meaning of relevant circumstances of scheme
(8) The relevant circumstances of a scheme
include:
(a) the extent to which the demerger benefit or capital benefit is
attributable to capital and profits (realised and unrealised) of the company or
of an associate (within the meaning in section 318) of the
company;
(b) the pattern of distributions of dividends, bonus shares and returns of
capital or share premium by the company or by an associate (within the meaning
in section 318) of the company;
(c) whether the relevant taxpayer has capital losses that, apart from the
scheme, would be carried forward to a later year of income;
(d) whether some or all of the ownership interests in the company or in an
associate (within the meaning in section 318) of the company held by the
relevant taxpayer were acquired, or are taken to have been acquired, by the
relevant taxpayer before 20 September 1985;
(e) whether the relevant taxpayer is a non-resident;
(f) whether the cost base (for the purposes of the Income Tax
Assessment Act 1997) of the relevant ownership interest is not substantially
less than the value of the applicable demerger benefit or capital
benefit;
(g) whether the relevant taxpayer or an associate (within the meaning in
section 318) of the taxpayer is a private company that would not have been
entitled to a rebate under section 46F if the taxpayer had been paid an
equivalent dividend instead of the demerger benefit or capital
benefit;
(h) if the scheme involves the distribution of share capital or share
premium—whether the interest held by the relevant taxpayer after the
distribution is the same as the interest would have been if an equivalent
dividend had been paid instead of the distribution of share capital or share
premium;
(i) if the scheme involves the provision of ownership interests and the
later disposal of those interests, or an increase in the value of ownership
interests and the later disposal of those interests:
(i) the period for which the ownership interests are held by the holder of
the interests; and
(ii) when the arrangement for the disposal of the ownership interests was
entered into;
(j) for a demerger only:
(i) whether the profits of the demerging entity are attributable to
transactions between the entity and an associate (within the meaning in
section 318) of the entity; and
(ii) whether the assets of the demerging entity were acquired under
transactions between the entity and an associate (within the meaning in
section 318) of the entity;
(k) any of the matters referred to in subparagraphs 177D(b)(i) to
(viii).
Meaning of obtaining a tax benefit
(9) A relevant taxpayer obtains a tax benefit if an amount
of tax payable, or any other amount payable under this Act, by the relevant
taxpayer would, apart from this section, be less than the amount that would have
been payable, or would be payable at a later time than it would have been
payable, if the demerger benefit had been an assessable dividend or the capital
benefit had been a dividend.
Expressions to have same meanings as in Part IIIAA
(10) Expressions used in this section that are defined in Part IIIAA
have the same meanings as in that Part.
(1) If the Commissioner makes a determination under subsection 45B(3), the
amount of the demerger benefit, or the part of the benefit, is taken not to be a
demerger dividend for the purposes of this Act for the owner of the ownership
interest or the relevant taxpayer at the time when the owner or relevant
taxpayer is provided with the demerger benefit.
(2) The amount of the demerger benefit is:
(a) if the benefit is the provision of an ownership interest—the
market value of the interest at the time that it is provided; or
(b) if the benefit is an increase in the value of an ownership
interest—the increase in the market value of the interest as a result of
the change; or
(c) if the benefit is a distribution to the shareholder of share capital
or share premium—the amount debited to the share capital account or share
premium account of the company in connection with the provision of the
benefit.
12 Section 45C
(heading)
Repeal the heading, substitute:
13 Subsection 45C(4)
Before “value” (wherever occurring), insert
“market”.
14 Paragraphs 45C(4)(a) and
(b)
Omit “a share”, substitute “an ownership
interest”.
15 Paragraphs 45C(4)(a) and
(b)
Omit “the share”, substitute “the
interest”.
16 Subsection 45D(1)
Repeal the subsection, substitute:
Notice by Commissioner of determination
(1) If the Commissioner makes a determination under section 45A, 45B
or 45C, the Commissioner must give a copy of the determination to the company
concerned (which, in the case of a demerger benefit referred to in
section 45B, is the head entity of the demerger group). The notice may be
included in a notice of assessment.
Notice by company of determination
(1A) That company must, in the case of a determination under
section 45A or 45B, give a copy of the notice to:
(a) the advantaged shareholder referred to in section 45A;
or
(b) the relevant taxpayer referred to in section 45B.
17 Section 109B
After “(See Subdivisions C and D.)”, insert “Also, this
Division does not apply to demerger dividends. (See Subdivision
DA.)”.
18 After Subdivision D of Division 7A of
Part III
Insert:
This Division does not apply to a demerger dividend to which
section 45B does not apply.
19 Subsection 128B(1)
Omit “and (3A)”, substitute “, (3A) and
(3D)”.
20 After subsection
128B(3C)
Insert:
(3D) This section does not apply to a demerger dividend to which
section 45B does not apply.
Part 3—Consequential
amendments
Income Tax Assessment Act
1997
21 At the end of
section 102-20
Add:
Note 4: The capital loss may be affected if the CGT asset
was owned by a member of a demerger group just before a demerger: see
section 125-170.
22 At the end of subsection
104-10(5)
Add:
Note 3: A capital gain or loss made by a demerging entity
from CGT event A1 happening as a result of a demerger is also disregarded: see
section 125-155.
23 At the end of subsection
104-25(5)
Add:
Note 5: Cost base adjustments are made only under
Subdivision 125-B if there is a roll-over under that Subdivision for CGT
event C2 happening as a result of a demerger.
Note 6: A capital gain or loss made by a demerging entity
from CGT event C2 happening as a result of a demerger is also disregarded: see
section 125-155.
24 At the end of subsection
104-70(6)
Add:
Note: Cost base adjustments are made only under
Subdivision 125-B if there is a roll-over under that Subdivision for CGT
event E4 happening as a result of a demerger.
25 At the end of subsection
104-135(4)
Add:
Note: Cost base adjustments are made only under
Subdivision 125-B if there is a roll-over under that Subdivision for CGT
event G1 happening as a result of a demerger.
26 At the end of subsection
104-155(5)
Add:
; or (g) a company or a trust that is a member of a
*demerger group issues new
*ownership interests under a
*demerger.
Note: For demergers, see Division 125.
27 At the end of subsection
104-175(7)
Add:
Note: CGT event J1 does not happen to a demerged entity or a
member of a demerger group if CGT event A1 or C2 happens to a demerging entity
under a demerger: see section 125-160.
28 At the end of
section 104-230
Add:
Note: A capital gain or loss made by a demerging entity from
CGT event K6 happening as a result of a demerger is also disregarded: see
section 125-155.
29 After
section 112-53
Insert:
|
Demergers |
|||
|---|---|---|---|
|
Item |
In this situation: |
Element affected: |
See section: |
|
1 |
There is a roll-over under Subdivision 125-B after a
demerger |
First element of cost base and reduced cost base of new interests and
remaining original interests |
125-80 |
|
2 |
There is a CGT event under a demerger but no roll-over under
Subdivision 125-B |
First element of cost base and reduced cost base of new interests and
remaining original interests |
125-85 |
|
3 |
There is a cost base adjustment under Subdivision 125-B but no CGT
event under a demerger |
First element of cost base and reduced cost base of new interests and
remaining original interests |
125-90 |
30 Subsection 112-105(3)
Repeal the subsection, substitute:
(3) All replacement-asset roll-overs are set out in the table in
section 112-115.
31 At the end of
section 112-110
Add:
Note 3: The reduced cost base may be further modified if the
replacement asset roll-over happens after a demerger: see
section 125-175.
32 Section 112-115 (before table
item 15)
Insert:
|
14C |
Demergers |
Division 125 |
33 Section 112-140
Omit the third sentence, substitute “All same-asset roll-overs are
set out in the table in section 112-150”.
34 Section 112-145
(note)
Omit “Note”, substitute “Note 1”.
35 At the end of
section 112-145
Add:
Note 2: The reduced cost base may be further modified if the
same asset roll-over happens after a demerger: see
section 125-175.
36 Subsection 122-70(2)
(note)
Omit “Note”, substitute “Note 1”.
37 At the end of subsection
122-70(2)
Add:
Note 2: The reduced cost base may be modified for a
roll-over happening after a demerger: see section 125-175.
38 Subsection 122-200(1)
(note)
Omit “Note”, substitute “Note 1”.
39 At the end of subsection
122-200(1)
Add:
Note 2: The reduced cost base (as determined under this
section) may be modified for a roll-over happening after a demerger: see
section 125-175.
40 At the end of subsection
124-10(3)
Add:
Note 5: The reduced cost base may be modified for a
roll-over happening after a demerger: see section 125-175.
41 At the end of
section 126-15
Add:
Note: The reduced cost base may be modified for a roll-over
happening after a demerger: see section 125-175.
42 Subsection 126-60(2)
(note)
Omit “Note”, substitute “Note 1”.
43 At the end of subsection
126-60(2)
Add:
Note 2: The reduced cost base may be modified for a
roll-over happening after a demerger: see section 125-175.
44 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
demerged entity has the meaning given by
section 125-70.
45 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
demerger has the meaning given by
section 125-70.
46 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
demerger dividend has the meaning given by subsection 6(1) of
the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.
47 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
demerger group has the meaning given by
section 125-65.
48 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
demerger subsidiary has the meaning given by
section 125-65.
49 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
demerging entity has the meaning given by
section 125-70.
50 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
dual listed company arrangement has the meaning given by
section 125-60.
51 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
dual listed company voting share has the meaning given by
section 125-60.
52 Subsection 995-1(1)
Insert:
head entity of a demerger group has the meaning
given by section 125-65.
53 Subsection 995-1(1) (definition of
ownership interest)
Repeal the definition, substitute:
ownership interest: an ownership
interest:
(a) in land or a *dwelling—has the
meaning given by section 118-130; and
(b) in a company or trust—has the meaning given by
section 125-60.
54 Transitional
A company that makes payments in respect of shares in the company under a
demerger that happens on or after 1 July 2002 and before this Act receives
the Royal Assent can choose to apply section 45B of the Income Tax
Assessment Act 1936 as that section existed before the amendments made by
this Act to the demerger rather than that section as amended by this Act
if:
(a) the head entity of the demerger group is a listed public company;
and
(b) the CGT events that happen under the demerger to all original
interests in that head entity are CGT event A1, CGT event C2 or CGT event
G1.
55 Application
The amendments made by this Schedule apply to demergers happening on or
after 1 July 2002.